WO2018127181A1 - Signal transmission method and apparatus - Google Patents
Signal transmission method and apparatus Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2018127181A1 WO2018127181A1 PCT/CN2018/071786 CN2018071786W WO2018127181A1 WO 2018127181 A1 WO2018127181 A1 WO 2018127181A1 CN 2018071786 W CN2018071786 W CN 2018071786W WO 2018127181 A1 WO2018127181 A1 WO 2018127181A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- signal
- information
- uplink
- spatial information
- spatial
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Ceased
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
- H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
- H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
- H04B7/0686—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission
- H04B7/0695—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission using beam selection
- H04B7/06952—Selecting one or more beams from a plurality of beams, e.g. beam training, management or sweeping
- H04B7/06968—Selecting one or more beams from a plurality of beams, e.g. beam training, management or sweeping using quasi-colocation [QCL] between signals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
- H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
- H04B7/08—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the receiving station
- H04B7/0868—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and combining
- H04B7/088—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and combining using beam selection
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
- H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
- H04B7/0404—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas the mobile station comprising multiple antennas, e.g. to provide uplink diversity
Definitions
- the present application relates to the field of communications technologies, and in particular, to a signal transmission method and apparatus.
- FIG. 1 is a structural diagram of a communication system including a plurality of wireless network devices (such as base stations) and a plurality of user equipments (UEs) covered by each network device.
- a plurality of wireless network devices such as base stations
- UEs user equipments
- Massive Multiple Input Multiple Output can further increase system capacity by utilizing more spatial degrees of freedom, becoming the key technology of the new Radio Access Technology (NR).
- NR Radio Access Technology
- NR beam-based transmission has become a major focus.
- the configuration of the large-scale antenna array enables high-resolution beams to be formed in the NR.
- the uplink transmission of the uplink signal by the UE ie, the spatial information or the direction information of the uplink signal
- the UE ie, the spatial information or the direction information of the uplink signal
- the embodiment of the invention provides a method and a device for signal transmission, so that the UE can determine the spatial information of the uplink signal to be transmitted more efficiently.
- an embodiment of the present invention provides a signal transmission method, including:
- the user equipment receives the first signal from the first wireless network device
- the user equipment receives the first indication information from the second wireless network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the second signal and the first signal have a quasi-co-location relationship with respect to the spatial information.
- the second wireless network device is the same as or different from the first wireless network device.
- the method further includes:
- the user equipment receives second indication information from the second wireless network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the first signal is used as a reference for spatial information of the second signal, and the second wireless network device
- the first wireless network device is the same or different.
- the determining, by the user equipment, the spatial information of the second signal to be sent according to the first signal includes:
- the determining, by the user equipment, the signal that the first signal belongs to the spatial information of the second signal may include: determining, by the user equipment, that the first signal has spatial information of the second signal. The characteristics of the signal.
- the first signal may include one or more signals
- the second signal/second signal related signal may include one or more signals
- an embodiment of the present invention provides a signal transmission method, including:
- the first wireless network device sends the first signal to the user equipment
- the first wireless network device receives a second signal from the user equipment, wherein the first signal is a reference to spatial information of the second signal.
- the first wireless network device sends first indication information to the user equipment, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the second signal and the first signal have a quasi-co-location relationship with respect to spatial information.
- the second wireless network device sends the first indication information to the user equipment, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the second signal and the first signal have a quasi-co-location relationship with respect to the spatial information.
- the method further includes: the first wireless network device sends second indication information to the user equipment, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the first signal is used as spatial information of the second signal. Reference.
- the second wireless network device sends second indication information to the user equipment, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the first signal is used as a reference for spatial information of the second signal.
- the reference that the first signal is the spatial information of the second signal includes:
- the first signal has a characteristic of a signal referenced by spatial information of the second signal.
- the second wireless network device is a serving wireless network device of the user equipment, where the first wireless network device is the serving wireless network device, or is other than the serving wireless network device Wireless network device.
- the first indication information is used to indicate that the second signal and the first signal have a quasi-co-location relationship with respect to spatial information, including:
- the first indication information is used to indicate that the resource information of the second signal and the resource information of the first signal have a quasi-co-location relationship with respect to the spatial information, where the resource information includes resource identification information, antenna port information, and channel state information measurement settings. At least one of identification information and process identification information.
- the first signal includes a non-zero power reference signal.
- the non-zero power reference signal included in the first signal is a non-zero power reference signal for obtaining channel state information, a non-zero power reference signal for demodulation, and a non-zero power. At least one of the beam management reference signals.
- the second signal includes a reference signal.
- the reference signal included in the second signal is at least one of a reference signal for demodulation and a reference signal for uplink channel measurement.
- the first indication information is included in a domain used to indicate quasi-co-location information
- the first indication information is included in the downlink control information, and the downlink control information further includes information used to indicate uplink scheduling; or
- the first indication information is included in an information field for indicating uplink scheduling related.
- the second indication information is included in configuration information of the first signal.
- the configuration information of the first signal includes a channel state information measurement setting field of the first signal, a process domain of the first signal, a resource domain of the first signal, and an antenna of the first signal. a port information field, and at least one of a beam information field in which the first signal is located.
- the second indication information includes a number of bits, the first signal corresponds to at least one of the several bits, and the at least one bit indicates the first signal is used as the second signal.
- the second indication information may be included in a channel state information measurement setting field of the first signal or a process domain of the first signal.
- the second indication information is a domain having a Boolean value, or the second indication information is only present when referring to the spatial information of the first signal as the second signal.
- the second indication information may be included in a resource domain of the first signal, an antenna port information field of the first signal, and at least one of a beam information field in which the first signal is located. .
- the feature of the signal referenced by the spatial information of the second signal includes resource information of the signal, where the resource information includes antenna port information, resource identifier information, channel state information measurement setting identifier information, and process identifier information.
- the signals includes at least one of a downlink control signal, a non-zero power reference signal, and a signal for beam management.
- the spatial information of the second signal includes an emission angle of the second signal, and an emission angle of the second signal is determined according to an angle of arrival of the first signal.
- the method further includes:
- the terminal device Transmitting, by the terminal device, the uplink signal according to the transmit power, where the uplink signal includes the second signal and/or a signal related to the second signal; and/or,
- the terminal device adjusts an uplink transmission timing advance amount according to a change value of the receiving time of the first signal
- the terminal device transmits an uplink signal based on the adjusted uplink transmission timing advance, the uplink signal including the second signal and/or a signal related to the second signal.
- the second signal related signal may be a signal that the intersection of the antenna port of the signal and the antenna port of the second signal is non-empty.
- the first signal may include one or more signals
- the second signal/second signal related signal may include one or more signals.
- a device for signal transmission which may be a chip in a user equipment or user equipment, including a processor, a memory, and a transceiver.
- the memory is configured to store instructions for executing the memory stored instructions to control transceivers to receive and transmit signals, and when the processor executes the instructions stored by the memory, the user equipment is used by Any one of the methods involved in the user equipment as described in the first aspect is completed.
- a device for signal transmission which may be a chip in a wireless network device or a wireless network device, including a processor, a memory, and a transceiver.
- the memory is configured to store instructions
- the processor is configured to execute the memory stored instructions to control transceivers to receive and transmit signals
- the wireless network device uses Any one of the methods involved in the first wireless network device or the second wireless network device as described in the second aspect.
- an apparatus for signal transmission comprising a module for implementing any of the methods involved in the foregoing user equipment.
- the specific modules may correspond to the method steps, and are not described herein.
- an apparatus for signal transmission including a module for implementing any one of the foregoing first wireless network device or second wireless network device.
- the specific modules may correspond to the method steps, and are not described herein.
- a computer storage medium for storing instructions that, when executed, perform any of the methods involved in the user equipment or the first or second wireless network device.
- the eighth aspect further provides a communication system, including the first wireless network device provided by the fourth aspect, and further includes the second wireless network device involved in the foregoing second aspect. Further, the user equipment provided by the aforementioned third aspect may be further included.
- a communication device having a function for implementing behavior of a first or second wireless network device or user equipment in the above method aspect, comprising corresponding steps or functions for performing the above method aspects Parts (means).
- the steps or functions may be implemented by software, or by hardware, or by a combination of hardware and software.
- the communication device described above includes one or more processors and transceiver units.
- the one or more processors are configured to support the first or second wireless network device or user equipment to perform respective functions in the above methods. For example, spatial information of the second signal to be transmitted is determined according to the first signal.
- the transceiver unit is configured to support the first or second wireless network device or user equipment to communicate with other devices to implement a receiving/transmitting function. For example, receiving the first signal, transmitting the second signal, or transmitting the first signal, receiving the second signal, and the like.
- the communication device may further include one or more memories for coupling with the processor, which store program instructions and data necessary for the communication device.
- the one or more memories may be integrated with the processor or may be separate from the processor. This application is not limited.
- the communication device may be a base station, a TRP or a user equipment (which may also be a terminal device), and the transceiver unit may be a transceiver or a transceiver circuit.
- the communication device can also be a communication chip.
- the transceiver unit can be an input/output circuit or an interface of a communication chip.
- the method, the device and the system provided by the embodiments of the present invention determine the uplink transmit beam by using the related information of the downlink receive beam, so that the UE can determine the spatial information of the uplink signal that is sent by the UE more efficiently.
- 3GPP Third Generation Partnership Project
- 3GPP Third Generation Partnership Project
- 3GPP related organization is referred to as a 3GPP organization.
- a wireless communication network is a network that provides wireless communication functions.
- the wireless communication network may use different communication technologies, such as code division multiple access (CDMA), wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA), time division multiple access (English: time) Division multiple access (TDMA), frequency division multiple access (FDMA), orthogonal frequency-division multiple access (OFDMA), single carrier frequency division Multiple Carrier (English: Single Carrier FDMA, SC-FDMA for short), Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance (English: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance).
- CDMA code division multiple access
- WCDMA wideband code division multiple access
- TDMA time division multiple access
- FDMA frequency division multiple access
- OFDMA orthogonal frequency-division multiple access
- Single carrier frequency division Multiple Carrier English: Single Carrier FDMA, SC-FDMA for short
- Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance English: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance
- the network can be divided into 2G (English
- a typical 2G network includes a global system for mobile communications/general packet radio service (GSM) network or a general packet radio service (GPRS) network.
- GSM global system for mobile communications/general packet radio service
- GPRS general packet radio service
- a typical 3G network is used.
- the network includes a universal mobile telecommunications system (UMTS) network.
- UMTS universal mobile telecommunications system
- a typical 4G network includes a long term evolution (LTE) network.
- LTE network long term evolution
- the UMTS network may also be referred to as a universal terrestrial radio access network (UTRAN).
- UTRAN universal terrestrial radio access network
- the LTE network may also be referred to as an evolved universal terrestrial radio access network (English: evolved universal terrestrial) Radio access network, referred to as E-UTRAN.
- a cellular communication network can be divided into a cellular communication network and a wireless local area network (English: wireless local area networks, WLAN for short), wherein the cellular communication network is dominated by scheduling, and the WLAN is dominant.
- the aforementioned 2G, 3G and 4G networks are all cellular communication networks. It should be understood by those skilled in the art that the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present invention can be mainly applied to a wireless communication network after 4G, such as a 4.5G or 5G network, or other non-cellular communication networks. For the sake of brevity, embodiments of the present invention sometimes refer to a wireless communication network as a network.
- the cellular communication network is a type of wireless communication network, which adopts a cellular wireless networking mode, and is connected between the terminal device and the network device through a wireless channel, thereby enabling users to communicate with each other during activities. Its main feature is the mobility of the terminal, and it has the function of handoff and automatic roaming across the local network.
- FDD frequency division duplex, frequency division duplex
- TDD time division duplex, time division duplex
- User equipment (English: user equipment, abbreviated as UE) is a terminal device, which can be a mobile terminal device or a non-mobile terminal device. The device is mainly used to receive or send business data. User equipment can be distributed in the network. User equipments have different names in different networks, such as: terminals, mobile stations, subscriber units, stations, cellular phones, personal digital assistants, wireless modems, wireless communication devices, handheld devices, knees. Upper computer, cordless phone, wireless local loop station, car terminal, drone equipment, smart home, IoT equipment, etc. The user equipment can communicate with one or more core networks via a radio access network (RAN) (access portion of the wireless communication network), such as exchanging voice and/or data with the radio access network.
- RAN radio access network
- a base station (BS) device also referred to as a base station, is a device deployed in a wireless access network to provide wireless communication functions.
- a device that provides a base station function in a 2G network includes a base transceiver station (BTS) and a base station controller (BSC), and the device that provides the base station function in the 3G network includes the node B ( NodeB) and a radio network controller (RNC), the device providing the function of the base station in the 4G network includes an evolved NodeB (abbreviated as eNB), and in the WLAN, the device providing the function of the base station is Access point (AP).
- BTS base transceiver station
- BSC base station controller
- RNC radio network controller
- eNB evolved NodeB
- AP Access point
- the device providing the function of the base station includes a node B (gNB) that continues to evolve, a transmission and reception point (TRP), and a transmission point (TP). Or relay, etc.
- the Node B, the TRP, and the TP may be a device including a baseband processing and a radio frequency part.
- the TRP and the TP may also be a radio unit (RU) or a remote radio unit (RRU). Among them, TRP is a commonly used name in NG, and TP is a commonly used name in LTE systems.
- a wireless device refers to a device that is located in a wireless communication network and that can communicate wirelessly.
- the device may be a wireless network device, such as a base station, a user equipment, or other network elements.
- a network-side device is a device located on the network side in a wireless communication network, and may be an access network element, such as a base station or a controller (if any), or may be a core network element or other network. yuan.
- NR new radio refers to a new generation of wireless access network technology that can be applied to future evolved networks, such as 5G networks.
- Wireless local area networks refer to local area networks that use radio waves as a data transmission medium.
- the transmission distance is generally only a few tens of meters.
- An access point that connects to a wireless network and can also connect to a wired network device. It can be used as an intermediary point to connect wired and wireless Internet devices to each other and transmit data.
- RRC radio resource control
- the RRC processes the third layer information of the control plane between the UE and the network side device.
- the RRC processes the third layer information of the control plane between the UE and the network side device.
- Usually contains at least one of the following features:
- the information provided by the non-access stratum of the broadcast core network is responsible for broadcasting the network system information to the UE.
- System information is usually repeated according to certain basic rules, and RRC is responsible for execution planning, segmentation, and repetition. It also supports the broadcast of upper layer information.
- the RRC is responsible for broadcasting the network system information to the UE.
- System information is usually repeated according to certain basic rules, and RRC is responsible for execution planning, segmentation, and repetition.
- the RRC connection between the UE and the network side device is established, re-established, maintained, and released.
- an RRC connection is established by the higher layer of the UE.
- the RRC connection setup procedure includes several steps of reselection of available cells, access grant control, and establishment of a layer 2 signal link.
- the RRC connection release is also requested by the upper layer to tear down the last signal connection; or when the RRC link fails, it is initiated by the RRC layer. If the connection fails, the UE will request to re-establish an RRC connection. If the RRC connection fails, the RRC releases the allocated resources.
- RRC Radio Resource Control
- Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system (only base station and UE are shown);
- FIG. 2 is a simplified schematic diagram of an internal structure of a base station and a UE according to an embodiment of the present invention
- 3a and 3b are schematic views of an emission angle and a reception angle described in an embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a DPS scenario according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- 5a, 5b, 5c and 5d are schematic flowcharts of a method for signal transmission according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of an apparatus (such as a wireless network device) for signal transmission according to an embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of another apparatus (such as a user equipment) for signal transmission according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- a component can be, but is not limited to being, a process running on a processor, a processor, an object, an executable, a thread in execution, a program, and/or a computer.
- an application running on a computing device and the computing device can be a component.
- One or more components can reside within a process and/or thread of execution, and a component can be located in a computer and/or distributed between two or more computers. Moreover, these components can execute from various computer readable media having various data structures thereon.
- These components may be passed, for example, by having one or more data packets (eg, data from one component that interacts with the local system, another component of the distributed system, and/or signaled through, such as the Internet)
- the network interacts with other systems to communicate in a local and/or remote process.
- the wireless network device may be a base station, the base station may be used to communicate with one or more user equipments, or may be used to communicate with one or more base stations having partial user equipment functions (such as a macro base station and a micro base station, such as Incoming, communication between the two); the wireless device can also be a user equipment, the user equipment can be used for communication (such as D2D communication) of one or more user equipments, and can also be used for communication with one or more base stations.
- partial user equipment functions such as a macro base station and a micro base station, such as Incoming, communication between the two
- the wireless device can also be a user equipment, the user equipment can be used for communication (such as D2D communication) of one or more user equipments, and can also be used for communication with one or more base stations.
- User equipment may also be referred to as user terminals and may include systems, subscriber units, subscriber stations, mobile stations, mobile wireless terminals, mobile devices, nodes, devices, remote stations, remote terminals, terminals, wireless communication devices, wireless communication devices, or Some or all of the features of the user agent.
- User equipment can be cellular phones, cordless phones, Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phones, smart phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (PDAs), laptop computers, handheld communication devices, handheld computing Devices, satellite wireless devices, wireless modem cards, in-vehicle devices, smart homes, drone devices, IoT devices, and/or other processing devices for communicating over wireless systems.
- SIP Session Initiation Protocol
- WLL wireless local loop
- PDAs personal digital assistants
- laptop computers handheld communication devices
- handheld computing Devices satellite wireless devices
- wireless modem cards wireless modem cards
- in-vehicle devices smart homes
- drone devices IoT devices, and/or other processing devices for communicating
- a base station may also be referred to as an access point, a node, a Node B, an evolved Node B (eNB), a TRP, a TP, a gNB, or some other network entity, and may include some or all of the functions of the above network entities.
- the base station can communicate with the wireless terminal over the air interface. This communication can be done by one or more sectors.
- the base station can act as a router between the wireless terminal and the rest of the access network by converting the received air interface frame to an IP packet, wherein the access network includes an Internet Protocol (IP) network.
- IP Internet Protocol
- the base station can also coordinate the management of air interface attributes and can also be a gateway between the wired network and the wireless network.
- the base station may be an evolved Node B (eNB), a radio network controller (RNC), a Node B (NB), and a base station controller (BSC).
- base transceiver station (BTS) home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), wireless fidelity (WIFI) system Access point (AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TRP or transmission point, TP), etc.
- BBU wireless fidelity
- AP wireless relay node
- TRP or transmission point, TP transmission point
- 5G such as NR, gNB in the system Or, a transmission point (TRP or TP), one or a group of base stations (including multiple antenna panels) in the 5G system, or, alternatively, a network node constituting a gNB or a transmission point, such as a baseband unit (BBU) ), or, distributed unit (DU, distributed unit), etc.
- the gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a DU.
- the gNB may also include a radio unit (RU).
- the CU implements some functions of the gNB, and the DU implements some functions of the gNB.
- the CU implements radio resource control (RRC), the function of the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, and the DU implements the wireless chain.
- RRC radio resource control
- PDCP packet data convergence protocol
- the DU implements the wireless chain.
- the functions of the radio link control (RLC), the media access control (MAC), and the physical (PHY) layer Since the information of the RRC layer eventually becomes information of the PHY layer or is transformed by the information of the PHY layer, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling or PHCP layer signaling, can also be used in this architecture.
- the network device can be a CU node, or a DU node, or a device including a CU node and a DU node.
- the CU may be divided into network devices in the access network RAN, and the CU may be divided into network devices in the core network CN, which is not limited herein.
- the TRP and the communication between the TRP and the UE are taken as an example for description. It can be understood that the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present invention may also be extended to between a UE and a UE (such as a device to device, a D2D communication scenario), or may be extended to a base station and a base station (such as a macro base station and a micro base station). Between ), it can also be extended to other wireless network devices except TRP.
- the application will present various aspects, embodiments, or features in a system that can include multiple devices, components, modules, and the like. It is to be understood and appreciated that the various systems may include additional devices, components, modules, etc. and/or may not include all of the devices, components, modules, etc. discussed in connection with the figures. In addition, a combination of these schemes can also be used.
- the word "exemplary” is used to mean an example, an illustration, or an illustration. Any embodiment or design described as “example” in this application should not be construed as preferred or advantageous over other embodiments or designs. Rather, the term use examples are intended to present concepts in a concrete manner.
- information, signal, message, and channel may sometimes be mixed. It should be noted that the meaning to be expressed is consistent when the difference is not emphasized. “of”, “corresponding (relevant)” and “corresponding” can sometimes be mixed. It should be noted that the meaning to be expressed is consistent when the distinction is not emphasized.
- Embodiments of the present invention may form the subject of the non-typo as W1, while not emphasize the difference, to express their meaning is the same.
- the network architecture and the service scenario described in the embodiments of the present invention are used to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present invention, and do not constitute a limitation of the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present invention.
- the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present invention are equally applicable to similar technical problems.
- the embodiment of the present invention can be applied to a time division duplex (TDD) scenario or a frequency division duplex (FDD) scenario.
- TDD time division duplex
- FDD frequency division duplex
- the embodiments of the present invention can be applied to a UE-centric communication scenario, in addition to being applicable to some existing communication scenarios.
- a non-cell network architecture is introduced, that is, a large number of small stations are deployed in a specific area to form a super cell ( Hyper cell), each station is a transmission point (TP) or TRP of the Hyper cell, and is connected to a centralized controller.
- TP transmission point
- TRP transmission point
- the UE may periodically send an uplink measurement reference signal, and after receiving the reference signal sent by the UE, the network side device may select an optimal TP and/or TRP set for the UE.
- Cluster, sub-cluster for its services.
- the network side device selects a new sub-cluster for the UE to serve, thereby avoiding true cell handover and achieving continuity of the UE service.
- the network side device includes a wireless network device.
- the scenario in the embodiment of the present invention is described by taking a scenario of a 4G network in a wireless communication network as an example. It should be noted that the solution in the embodiment of the present invention may also be applied to other wireless communication networks, and corresponding names may also be used in other scenarios. The name of the corresponding function in the wireless communication network is replaced.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system.
- the communication system can include a core network, an access network, and a terminal. Only the wireless network devices included in the access network, such as base stations, and terminals, such as user equipment, are shown in FIG.
- FIG. 2 is a simplified schematic diagram of the internal structure of a base station and a UE.
- Exemplary base stations may include an antenna array, a duplexer, a transmitter (TX), and a receiver (RX) (sometimes, TX and RX are collectively referred to as transceiver TRX), and a baseband processing portion.
- the duplexer is used to implement the antenna array for both transmitting signals and receiving signals.
- TX is used to convert between RF signal and baseband signal.
- TX can include power amplifier PA, digital-to-analog converter DAC and frequency converter.
- RX can include low noise amplifier LNA, analog-to-digital converter ADC and frequency converter.
- the baseband processing section is used to implement processing of transmitted or received signals, such as layer mapping, precoding, modulation/demodulation, encoding/decoding, etc., and for physical control channels, physical data channels, physical broadcast channels, reference signals, etc. Perform separate processing.
- the base station may further include a control portion for performing multi-user scheduling and resource allocation, pilot scheduling, user physical layer parameter configuration, and the like.
- Exemplary UEs may include an antenna, a duplexer, a transmitter (TX), and a receiver (RX) (sometimes, TX and RX are collectively referred to as transceiver TRX), and a baseband processing portion.
- TX transmitter
- RX receiver
- the UE has a single antenna. It can be understood that the UE can also have multiple antennas (ie, an antenna array).
- the duplexer is used to implement the antenna array for both transmitting signals and receiving signals.
- TX is used to convert between RF signal and baseband signal.
- TX can include power amplifier PA, digital-to-analog converter DAC and frequency converter.
- RX can include low noise amplifier LNA, analog-to-digital converter ADC and frequency converter.
- the baseband processing section is used to implement processing of transmitted or received signals, such as layer mapping, precoding, modulation/demodulation, encoding/decoding, etc., and for physical control channels, physical data channels, physical broadcast channels, reference signals, etc. Perform separate processing.
- the UE may further include a control part, configured to request an uplink physical resource, calculate channel state information (CSI) corresponding to the downlink channel, determine whether the downlink data packet is successfully received, or the like.
- CSI channel state information
- Beam refers to the adjustment of the weight on the antenna (port) so that the energy of the transmitted and/or received signals has a certain directivity (ie, concentrated in a certain direction). Such aggregation is called a beam.
- corresponding to the transmitted signal is a transmit beam
- for the received signal is a receive beam.
- the transmit beam and the receive beam can be referred to as a beam pair.
- the beam in the NR is divided into the TRP side and the UE side, and the TRP and the UE can respectively form a digital beam by precoding at the baseband and an analog beam by the phase shifter at the radio frequency. Since Massive MIMO technology will be applied in NR, a large number of antennas can make the formed beam have high resolution and the beam is narrow. In this case, the directivity of the beam is more pronounced. Therefore, there is a certain requirement for the alignment of the transmit beam and the receive beam (referred to as beam alignment).
- the discussion of current beam alignment is mainly focused on the downlink, which is generally obtained by beam scanning to obtain several beam pairs.
- the downlink beam scanning may be: the TRP forms and transmits multiple downlink beams (also referred to as downlink transmitting beams), and the UE receives multiple downlink beams.
- the UE may pass the phase of the phase shifter.
- the weighting of the antenna ports in the handover and/or baseband is adjusted to form a plurality of downlink receive beams (also referred to as downlink beams), so that the optimal downlink is determined by scanning and measuring multiple downlink transmit beams and multiple downlink receive beams.
- a beam pair, wherein the downlink beam pair includes a pair of downlink transmit beams (TRP side) and a downlink receive beam (UE side).
- the downlink transmit beam and the downlink receive beam are further determined.
- the UE transmits multiple uplink beams (also referred to as uplink transmit beams), the TRP receives multiple uplink beams, and the TRP passes phase shift and/or baseband of the phase shifter during the TRP receiving multiple uplink beams.
- the weight adjustment of the middle antenna port may form multiple uplink receive beams, which may be determined by scanning and measuring multiple uplink transmit beams (also referred to as uplink beams) and multiple uplink receive beams (also referred to as uplink beams).
- the best uplink beam pair wherein the uplink beam pair includes a pair of uplink transmit beams (UE side) and an uplink receive beam (TRP side).
- an angle of departure (AoD) of an uplink transmit beam is defined as an angle of arrival of a downlink receive beam (
- the angle of arrival (AoA) is inferred, that is, the transmission angle of the uplink transmit beam may be determined according to the arrival angle of the downlink receive beam, and may be determined according to the relationship between the transmit angle of the uplink transmit beam and the arrival angle of the downlink receive beam. For example, the relationship may be that the transmission angle of the uplink transmit beam is the same as the arrival angle of the downlink receive beam.
- the relationship can also be other situations.
- the relationship may be pre-defined by the protocol, and may be pre-stored on the UE side or configured by the TRP, which is not limited herein.
- the UE determines the downlink receive beam
- the corresponding uplink transmit beam can be determined.
- a schematic diagram of the emission angle and the angle of arrival is given in Figures 3a and 3b.
- the angle of arrival (AoA) is the angle between the direction of arrival of the signal and a certain direction (such as the horizontal direction), and the angle of emission, also called the angle of departure (AoD), is the direction of the signal.
- the angle between a certain direction (such as the horizontal direction).
- the algorithm for estimating the estimated AoA/AoD may be specifically referred to by the UE, and is not described in detail herein.
- the case where the strongest path among the plurality of paths is taken as an example is shown in FIGS. 3a and 3b.
- the angle of arrival of the uplink receiving beam on the TRP side may also be related to the transmission angle of the downlink transmitting beam. That is, the angle of arrival of the uplink receiving beam on the TRP side may also be determined according to the transmission angle of the downlink transmitting beam.
- the relationship between the angle of arrival of the uplink receive beam on the TRP side and the transmission angle of its downlink transmit beam is determined. For example, the relationship may be that the transmission angle of the downlink transmit beam is the same as the arrival angle of the uplink receive beam. It can be understood that this relationship can also be other situations.
- the relationship may be pre-defined by the protocol, and may be pre-stored on the TRP side or configured by the TRP, which is not limited herein.
- the transmission angle of the uplink transmit beam and the angle of arrival of the uplink receive beam can be determined in a relatively simple manner.
- the UE receives multiple downlink beams.
- the UE has multiple arrival angles of the downlink reception beams, and how does the UE determine the transmission angle of the uplink transmission beam and which downlink reception beam arrives? Angle, or how the UE determines which of the uplink transmit beams that have been obtained by scanning and measuring, which needs further discussion.
- the scenario in which the UE receives multiple downlink beams includes a single base station MIMO application, or due to some communication scenarios, such as a CoMP scenario, such as joint tranmission (JT), dynamic point selection (dynamic point selection, DPS), or due to multi-panel communication.
- JT joint tranmission
- DPS dynamic point selection
- FIG. 4 it is a schematic diagram of a DPS scenario.
- the UE receives downlink data from only one TRP at a time, such as a signal on the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH, that is, the UE dynamically receives beams from multiple TRPs.
- the feedback of the UE's uplink channel state information should remain in communication with the serving cell, rather than being sent to the cooperating cell. Therefore, if the UE determines the direction of the uplink transmission based on the beam direction of the downlink data being transmitted, the problem that the serving cell that needs to receive the uplink channel state information cannot receive the signal. Therefore, in this scenario, the UE needs to instruct the UE to uplink transmit downlink resources to be referenced, so as to avoid the problem of beam gain loss or even communication interruption of uplink transmission.
- the UE and the TRP form a plurality of uplink beam pairs by uplink beam scanning and measurement.
- the TRP sends the resource information of the uplink signal to be sent by the UE, such as the antenna port number of the reference signal, and/or the resource information of the uplink receiving beam of the uplink signal to be received by the TRP, so that the UE can determine the information according to the information.
- the uplink transmit beam corresponding to the uplink signal to be transmitted, and/or the TRP can determine the uplink receive beam corresponding to the uplink signal to be received according to the information.
- the UE determines, according to the downlink signal received from the TRP, an uplink transmit beam corresponding to the uplink signal to be sent.
- the method provided in the embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the TRP and the UE having the downlink beam pair, and the uplink beam pair is not obtained by scanning and measuring, and can also be applied to the TRP and the UE having the downlink beam pair and scanning and The measurement is obtained in the case of obtaining an uplink beam pair.
- a possible solution includes:
- the user equipment receives the first signal from the first wireless network device.
- the user equipment determines spatial information of the second signal to be sent according to the first signal, and sends the second signal to be sent by using the spatial information.
- the spatial information of the second signal includes an emission angle (starting angle) of the second signal, and an emission angle of the second signal is determined according to an angle of arrival of the first signal.
- determining the emission angle of the second signal according to the arrival angle of the first signal may include:
- the emission angle of the second signal is the same as the angle of arrival of the first signal, or
- the emission angle of the second signal has a certain correspondence with the angle of arrival of the first signal, or
- the transmission angle of the uplink beam is selected from the existing uplink beam pairs as the transmission angle of the second signal.
- the emission angle of the uplink beam closest to the angle of arrival of the first signal is selected as the emission angle of the second signal.
- the implementation shown in Figure 5b includes:
- the second wireless network device sends the first indication information to the user equipment, and correspondingly, the user equipment receives the first indication information from the second wireless network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the second signal and the first A signal has a quasi co-location relationship with respect to spatial information.
- the quasi-co-location relationship of the second signal and the first signal with respect to the spatial information may refer to:
- the spatial information of the second signal can be inferred by the spatial information of the first signal, wherein the spatial information can include an Angle of Arrival (AoA, also referred to as an angle of arrival or a reception angle), and an Angle of departure (Angle of departure) , AoD, which may also be referred to as a departure angle or an emission angle, at least one of an Angle of arrival spread, an Angle of departure spread, and a spatial correlation.
- AoA Angle of Arrival
- Angle of departure Angle of departure
- the second signal and the first signal have a quasi-co-location relationship with respect to the spatial information, including:
- the resource information of the second signal and the resource information of the first signal have a quasi-co-location relationship with respect to the spatial information, that is, the spatial information of the resource information of the second signal can be inferred according to the spatial information of the resource information of the first signal, where
- the resource information includes at least one of resource identification information, antenna port information, channel state information measurement setting identification information, and process identification information.
- the first indication information may be sent by using the high layer signaling or the physical layer signaling.
- the first signal includes a non-zero power reference signal.
- the non-zero power reference signal included in the first signal is a non-zero power reference signal for obtaining channel state information, a non-zero power reference signal for demodulation, and a non-zero power At least one of a beam-managed reference signal, a synchronization signal, and a tracking reference signal Tracking RS for time and frequency synchronization tracking.
- the reference signal used to obtain channel state information may be a channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS)
- the reference signal used for demodulation may be a demodulation reference signal. (demodulation reference signal, DMRS).
- the reference signal used to obtain channel state information may be a CSI-RS, or may be another reference signal having a function of obtaining channel state information
- the reference signal used for demodulation may be a DMRS, or may be used for other purposes.
- the reference signal for beam management may be a beam management reference signal (BMRS), and the reference signal for beam management may be used for measurement of large-scale characteristics of the beam, and further Used for beam scanning, alignment and correction, such as by measuring the gain in large-scale characteristics, using the beam pair with the largest gain as a pair of beam pairs.
- BMRS beam management reference signal
- the second signal includes a reference signal.
- the reference signal can be a non-zero power reference signal or a zero power reference signal.
- the reference signal included in the second signal is at least one of a reference signal used for demodulation and a reference signal used for uplink channel measurement.
- the reference signal used for demodulation may be a DMRS
- the reference signal used for uplink channel measurement may be a sounding reference signal (SRS).
- the reference signal used for demodulation may be a DMRS, or may be other reference signals for demodulation functions
- the reference signal used for uplink channel measurement may be SRS, or other uplink channel measurement functions may be used.
- Reference signal may be a DMRS, or may be other reference signals for demodulation functions.
- the first indication information may be included in a domain for indicating quasi-co-location information, such as a physical downlink shared channel resource element mapping and a quasi-co-location indication domain (PDSCH RE Mapping) in an LTE system. And Quasi-Co-Location Indicator field, PQI).
- a domain for indicating quasi-co-location information such as a physical downlink shared channel resource element mapping and a quasi-co-location indication domain (PDSCH RE Mapping) in an LTE system.
- PDSCH RE Mapping quasi-co-location indication domain
- PQI Quasi-Co-Location Indicator field
- LTE introduced the antenna port quasi-co-location, which is referred to as QCL (Quasi Co- in the LTE system). Located) concept. Signals sent from the QCL's antenna port will pass the same large-scale fading. Large-scale fading includes delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average channel gain, and average delay.
- the downlink data is received from the cooperative TRP (the TRP to which the coordinated cell belongs) through the PDSCH, and a new type is defined in the version 11
- the transmission mode that is, the transmission mode 10 (TM10), mainly introduces the foregoing physical downlink shared channel resource element mapping and quasi-co-location indication (PQI), which is used to indicate which TRP the downlink data is sent from.
- PQI physical downlink shared channel resource element mapping and quasi-co-location indication
- the corresponding large-scale characteristics of the channel are consistent with which set of antenna ports.
- the UE can know the radio channel parameters corresponding to which group of antenna ports are used to demodulate the downlink data according to the PQI and the PDSCH mapping message element configured by the Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling. .
- RRC Radio Resource Control
- Type A QCL type (Type) A
- Type B the antenna port corresponding to the non-zero power channel state information reference signal (NZP CSI-RS) resource indicated by the PDSCH antenna port and the upper layer parameter is QCL.
- NZP CSI-RS non-zero power channel state information reference signal
- the UE may assume the antenna ports 0–3,7–30 of a serving cell are quasi co-located(as defined in[3])with respect to delay spread,Doppler spread,Doppler shift,and average delay .
- the UE may assume the antenna ports 15–30 corresponding to the CSI-RS resource configuration identified by the higher layer parameter qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPId-r11(defined in subclause 7.1.9) and the antenna ports 7 –14 associated with the PDSCH are quasi co-located(as defined in[3])with respect to Doppler shift,Doppler spread,average delay,and delay spread.
- Type A The UE can assume that the antenna ports 0-3, 7-30 of the serving cell are QCLs for delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift and average delay.
- Type B The UE can assume that the antenna port 15-30 corresponding to the CSI-RS resource configured by the higher layer parameter qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPID-r11 and the antenna port 7-14 associated with the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) are related. Delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift and average delay QCL.
- the antenna port 15-30 is an antenna port of the CSI-RS
- the antenna port 7-14 is an antenna port of the PDSCH
- the DMRS antenna port is generally consistent with the PDSCH.
- Type B also indicates the CSI-RS antenna port that has a QCL relationship with the DMRS antenna port.
- a plurality of sets of possible parameter sets may be sent (also referred to as configurations) by high-level signaling, such as radio resource control (RRC) signaling.
- RRC radio resource control
- a plurality of sets of possible parameter sets may be sent (also referred to as configurations) by high-level signaling, such as radio resource control (RRC) signaling.
- RRC radio resource control
- a possible set of parameters is issued.
- DCI physical layer signaling
- a group of four sets of possible parameter sets to be activated is indicated.
- the foregoing group for indicating that the four sets of possible parameter sets need to be activated is a PDSCH RE Mapping and Quasi-Co-Location Indicator (PQI) domain.
- One of the parameters included in the parameter set delivered by the high-layer signaling is an identifier for indicating a CSI-RS resource having a QCL relationship with a PDSCH resource configured by the parameter set, for example, qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPId-r11 This domain.
- the identity of the CSI-RS resource indicates the resource configuration of a group of CSI-RSs.
- the identifier of the CSI-RS resource may be csi-RS-ConfigNZPId.
- the configuration of each CSI-RS resource includes the number of antenna ports of the CSI-RS resource (for example, an antennaPortsCount-r11 cell (which may also be a domain)) , resource configuration (such as resourceConfig-r11 cell), subframe configuration (such as subframeConfig-r11 cell), scrambling identifier (such as scramblingIdentity-r11 cell), and CRS with QCL relationship with the CSI-RS resource (public)
- One or more of the reference signal (common reference signal) (eg, qcl-CRS-Info-r11 cell).
- the cells included in the resource configuration of a group of CSI-RSs may be as follows (3GPP TS 36.211):
- the foregoing PQI domain may be delivered by DCI (downlink control information) format 2D.
- DCI downlink control information
- the PQI domain may occupy 2 bits.
- PQI 2bit For example, the meaning of PQI 2bit can be as follows:
- the UE can know which one of the parameter sets used by using the received Quasi-Co-Location Indicator field signaling, and can know the CSI-RS port and the CRS port according to the configuration in the CSI-RS in the parameter set.
- the relationship in turn, can be used to know the CRS port to be referred to for demodulation, frequency offset correction, etc. when receiving the PDSCH corresponding to the parameter set.
- delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift and average delay are large-scale parameters, one antenna port, such as antenna port A and another antenna port, such as antenna port B
- the QCL of the large-scale parameter means that the large-scale parameter of the channel of the antenna port B can be inferred by the large-scale parameter of the channel obtained by the antenna port A.
- Large scale parameters can also include Average gain.
- spatial information also referred to as a spatial parameter
- the spatial information may include an Angle of Arrival, an Angle of departure (also referred to as an emission angle), an Angle of arrival spread, an Angle of departure spread, At least one of spatial correlations.
- the spatial correlation can be related to the correlation matrix of the signal. An element in the correlation matrix of the signal is used to describe the correlation between the two antenna elements.
- the antenna unit may be an antenna element or an antenna panel, or may be another antenna unit, which is not limited herein.
- QCL can also be applied to multi-panel transmissions.
- the QCL hypothesis may further include: a QCL of the foregoing second signal and the first signal with respect to spatial information.
- Type B in the QCL hypothesis may further include:
- the UE may assume the antenna ports 15-30 corresponding to the CSI-RS resource configuration identified by the higher layer parameter qcl-Csirs-UplinkSRS and the antenna ports 40-43 are quasi co-located with respect to Angle of arrival/Angle of departure .
- the UE can assume that the antenna ports 15-30 and antenna ports 40-43 corresponding to the CSI-RS resources indicated by the higher layer parameter qcl-Csirs-UplinkSRS are QCLs regarding the angle of arrival and the departure angle.
- the antenna ports 40-43 may be uplink SRS ports.
- the second wireless network device may send multiple sets of parameter sets for data transmission by using high-layer signaling, such as RRC signaling.
- each set of parameter sets may include content such as the content of the pre-determined parameter set. (It may not include part of the foregoing parameter set, which is not limited herein).
- resource information such as a resource identifier, for indicating a first signal having a QCL relationship with the second signal. For example, if the second signal is an uplink SRS and the first signal is a CSI-RS, the resource identifier of the CSI-RS may be included in each set of parameter sets.
- each set of parameter sets further includes a resource identifier of a CSI-RS having a QCL relationship with the PDSCH, a combination of a resource identifier of a CSI-RS having a QCL relationship with a PDSCH and a CSI-RS resource identifier having a QCL relationship with an uplink SRS (ie, joint coding), the number of parameter sets can be determined, and the index information of the parameter sets having different combinations can be obtained. For example, there may be four resource identifiers of a CSI-RS having a QCL relationship with a PDSCH, and four CSI-RS resource identifiers having a QCL relationship with an uplink SRS, and 16 parameter sets having different combinations of the combinations. .
- the second wireless network device may send a field, such as a PQI, for indicating the quasi co-location information to the UE, to send the foregoing first indication information to the UE.
- a field such as a PQI
- the domain used to indicate the quasi-co-location information may be delivered by using DCI.
- the domain used to indicate the quasi-co-location information may also be delivered by using high layer signaling.
- the parameter set used by the UE may be indicated by a 4-bit domain, that is, the first indication information is the 4-bit domain, and the domain may indicate the quasi-common Address information.
- the UE learns the resource identification information of the CSI-RS having the QCL relationship with the uplink SRS included in the parameter set according to the 4-bit domain from the second radio network device.
- the parameter set since the parameter set further includes resource identification information of a CSI-RS having a QCL relationship with the PDSCH resource, the UE may also obtain information about a PDSCH resource having a QCL relationship with the uplink SRS, such as information of a DMRS antenna port.
- the 16 parameter sets and the numbers 16 and 4 in the 4 bit field are exemplified, and may be other values, which are not limited herein.
- the plurality of sets of parameter sets for data transmission may be included in a domain of higher layer signaling, and the set of parameters may include at least one of the following parameters:
- the number of ports of the cell reference signal, the port number of the cell reference signal, the frequency domain position indication of the cell reference signal, and the time domain position indication of the cell reference signal are the number of ports of the cell reference signal, the port number of the cell reference signal, the frequency domain position indication of the cell reference signal, and the time domain position indication of the cell reference signal,
- the resource includes at least one of a time domain resource, a frequency domain resource, or a beam resource, optionally, the indication may be an index or an identifier
- the time domain unit indication in which the synchronization signal is located may be one or more of a subframe, a time slot, an OFDM symbol, or a minislot, which may be an index or an identifier, for example,
- the configuration information may be a time domain unit format of MBSFN transmission, which is used to indicate a time domain unit occupied by MBSFN transmission,
- the time domain unit can be one or more of a subframe, a time slot, a symbol, or a mini time slot
- the resource location indication of the downlink data channel (such as the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH)
- the resource location may be a time domain of the PDSCH, a frequency domain resource location, where the time domain location may be a time domain resource occupied by the PDSCH, such as a PDSCH
- the starting and/or ending OFDM symbols, the frequency domain location may refer to the frequency domain resources occupied by the PDSCH
- a resource indication of a signal CSI-RS for obtaining a channel state for indicating a non-zero power of a QCL relationship of a downlink DMRS (the resource indication may be used to indicate a time-frequency position and/or sequence of CSI-RS pilots, an example
- the resource indication which may be a resource identifier of the CSI-RS, is used to indicate a large-scale parameter indication of a QCL relationship of the downlink DMRS (the indication is used to indicate a large-scale parameter having a QCL relationship with the CSI-RS, for example,
- the indication may be a large-scale parameter type indication for indicating a QCL relationship between the CSI-RS and the DMRS, and may also be a large-scale parameter indication for indicating a QCL relationship between the CSI-RS and the DMRS,
- a resource identification indication of a signal CSI-RS for obtaining a channel state for indicating a non-zero power of a QCL relationship of an uplink SRS, a signal CSI for obtaining a channel state for indicating a non-zero power of a QCL relationship of an uplink SRS The port indication of the RS, the time-frequency position indication of the signal CSI-RS for obtaining the channel state of the non-zero power indicating the QCL relationship of the uplink SRS, and the resource indication of the downlink DMRS for indicating the QCL relationship of the uplink SRS, a port (group) indication of a downlink DMRS indicating a QCL relationship of the uplink SRS, a time-frequency position indication of a downlink DMRS for indicating a QCL relationship of the uplink SRS, and a resource indication for indicating a synchronization signal of a QCL relationship of the uplink SRS (eg, The time domain unit in which the synchronization signal is located indicates the resource number
- the definition of QCL can refer to the definition of QCL in 5G.
- the definition of QCL is: the signal transmitted from the antenna port of QCL will undergo the same large-scale fading, wherein large-scale fading It includes one or more of the following parameters: delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average channel gain, average delay and airspace parameters.
- the airspace parameter can be the emission angle (AOA), the main emission angle.
- Dominant AoA Dominant AoA
- Average AoA Angle of Arrival
- AOD Angle of Arrival
- Channel Correlation Matrix Power Angle Spread Spectrum of Angle of Arrival
- Average AoD Power Angle Spread Spectrum of Departure Angle
- Transmit Channel Correlation One or more of Sex Receive Channel Correlation, Transmit Beamforming, Receive Beamforming, Spatial Channel Correlation, Filters, Spatial Filter Parameters, or Spatial Receive Parameters.
- the indication may be an identifier or an index, which is not limited herein.
- the time domain unit may be one or more of a subframe, a time slot, an OFDM symbol, or a mini-slot.
- the UE may determine, by using the first indication information, a parameter set that is activated in the multiple sets of parameter sets, and obtain corresponding parameters, for example, knowing the QCL relationship between the DMRS receiving the PDSCH and the CSI-RS, and transmitting the SRS and the first The QCL relationship of a signal.
- the first indication information is included in the downlink control information, where the downlink control information further includes information for indicating uplink scheduling related information, where the uplink scheduling related information includes: when uplinking At least one of a frequency mapping position and a modulation coding mode.
- the first indication information is not included in the domain for indicating the QCL information, such as PQI, but the other indication information is carried by other bits (domains), such as by the uplink QCL indication field (Uplink Quasi- Co-Location Indicator), the field includes a number of bits, and the binary value of the several bits or each of the bits (in the form of a bitmap) may indicate information of the first signal having a QCL relationship with the second signal. The number of bits of these bits is related to the number of pieces of information of the first signal having a QCL relationship with the second signal.
- the uplink QCL indication field Uplink Quasi- Co-Location Indicator
- the number of bits of the several bits may be two, where “00”, “01”, “10”, “11” respectively indicate 4
- One of the CSI-RS resource identifiers, or the number of bits of the number of bits may be four, and each bit corresponds to one of the four CSI-RS resource identifiers.
- one bit of 1 may indicate corresponding The CSI-RS resource identifier is activated, and 0 indicates that the corresponding CSI-RS resource identifier is not activated.
- the uplink QCL indication field may be a domain dedicated to indicating a QCL relationship between the second signal and the first signal, or the uplink QCL indication domain may be included in an SRS request domain (such as in an SRS request domain). Field).
- the SRS request field is an SRS request sent by the base station to the UE in the downlink control information, where the SRS request field is used to trigger the UE to send the SRS, or the closed loop power control parameter used to instruct the UE to send the uplink signal.
- the first indication information such as an uplink QCL indication field
- the first indication information may be a domain that is carried in the DCI and is dedicated to indicating a QCL relationship between the second signal and the first signal, or the first indication information may be A joint indication with other indication information, such as the first indication information, may be jointly indicated with the indication information of the SRS request.
- the SRS request field is an SRS request that is sent by the base station to the UE in the downlink control information, where the SRS request field is used to trigger the UE to send the SRS.
- the information field may also be used to indicate that the UE sends the uplink signal. Closed loop power control parameters.
- the first radio network device may send downlink control information to the UE, where the downlink control information may carry an SRS request field, where the SRS request field is used to indicate that the UE sends the SRS information, where the SRS request domain may also be used for the first indication information.
- the partial field of the SRS request field may represent the first indication information, or the indication bit representation of the SRS request field may represent the first indication information.
- the first indication information may be included in an information field used to indicate uplink scheduling related.
- the first wireless network device sends a first signal to the user equipment.
- the user equipment receives the first signal from the first wireless network device.
- the first wireless network device may be the same as the second wireless network device, that is, It can also be different for the same wireless network device.
- the first wireless network device may be a wireless network device to which the serving cell of the user equipment belongs, or may be a wireless network device to which the coordinated cell of the user equipment belongs; the second wireless network device may be a service cell to which the user equipment belongs. Wireless network device.
- the user equipment determines spatial information of the second signal according to the first signal, and sends the second signal to the first wireless network device by using spatial information of the second signal.
- the spatial information of the second signal includes an emission angle of the second signal, and an emission angle of the second signal is determined according to an angle of arrival of the first signal.
- the first wireless network device may further determine a reception angle of arrival of the second signal according to the first signal, and receive the second signal by using the reception angle of arrival.
- an operation mode for determining spatial information may be as follows: the UE adjusts the weight value of the physical and/or logical antenna, such as adjusting the phase of the analog phase shifter and/or adjusting the precoding matrix of the digital precoding to adjust the weight value. , thereby forming an array of weights.
- the UE may adjust the weights to form a reception weight matrix when receiving the signal.
- the purpose of the UE to form the receive matrix is to optimize signal reception performance, reduce interference, and the like.
- the UE may obtain the receiving spatial information of the first signal according to the energy distribution of the first signal in the air domain, thereby selecting the receiving matrix receiving signal that the UE considers to be the most suitable. For example, receiving the first signal according to the energy distribution of the first signal in the air domain.
- the spatial information may include a correlation matrix obtained from a spatial power spectrum of the signal by a mathematical transformation such as a Fourier transform.
- the weights adjusted when the signal is transmitted form a transmission weight matrix.
- the UE determines spatial information of the second signal according to spatial information of the plurality of signals in the first signal. Specifically, the UE may process the multiple signals in the first signal to obtain spatial information of the second signal, such as the spatial or angular domain or beam domain information corresponding to the spatial information of each signal in the first signal.
- the UE may use the spatial information of the partial signal in the first signal as the useful signal spatial information, and the UE may use the spatial information of the partial signal in the first signal as the interference spatial information, and the UE may obtain the spatial information of the second signal.
- the spatial or angular domain or beam domain information corresponding to the partial signal of the first signal is used as the useful signal spatial information, and the spatial or angular domain or beam domain information corresponding to the partial signal is used as the interference spatial information.
- a useful signal can also be referred to as a channel.
- the UE may use the same or similar spatial information for the multiple signals corresponding to the second signal.
- the first signal includes multiple signals, which may indicate that the first signal includes multiple CSI-RS resources, or a CSI-RS port;
- the second signal includes multiple signals, which may indicate that the first signal includes multiple SRS resources, or SRS port.
- the UE may use the receiving direction of the first signal as a reference for the sending direction of the second signal.
- the UE may adjust the transmit antenna weight such that the transmit weight matrix of the second signal and the receive weight matrix of the first signal have a conjugate matrix relationship.
- the conjugate matrix relationship between the transmission weight matrix of the second signal and the reception weight matrix of the first signal includes: the transmission weight matrix of the second signal is Hermite of the first signal reception weight matrix. Matrix.
- the first wireless network device (TRP1) and the second wireless network device (TRP2) both send data to the UE, and the CSI-issued by the TRP1.
- the RS resource ID is the same as the CSI-RS resource ID that has the QCL relationship with the second signal (such as the SRS) indicated by the first indication information received by the UE. Therefore, the UE determines the second according to the CSI-RS resource ID delivered by the TRP1.
- the spatial information of the signal such as the direction of the transmit beam of the second signal, is directed to TRP1.
- the CSI-RS resource ID sent by the TRP2 is different from the CSI-RS resource ID indicated by the first indication information received by the UE and has a QCL relationship with the second signal (such as SRS). Therefore, the UE does not send the second to the TRP2. signal.
- the spatial information of the second signal that the UE needs to send is multiple, for example, in a JT scenario, the UE may send data signals and/or control signals to multiple TRPs, then corresponding
- the spatial information of the first signal may also be multiple, for example, there may be more than one TRP using the same antenna port or resource identification of the first signal with the QCL relationship of the spatial information with respect to the second signal. Thereby the purpose of determining a plurality of spatial information of the second signal to be transmitted is achieved.
- a reference signal such as an SRS
- an antenna port and an uplink data channel such as a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH)
- an uplink control channel such as The antenna ports of the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) are the same.
- the UE may further determine spatial information of the signal related to the second signal, such as an uplink control channel, an uplink data signal, and spatial information of at least one of the reference signals for uplink demodulation, according to the spatial information of the second signal.
- spatial information of the signal related to the second signal such as an uplink control channel, an uplink data signal, and spatial information of at least one of the reference signals for uplink demodulation, according to the spatial information of the second signal.
- the UE may determine spatial information of the second signal by first indication information indicating the QCL of the second signal and the first signal with respect to the spatial information, and the first signal received by the UE.
- the foregoing S101 is optional.
- the first signal having a QCL relationship with the second signal is a fixed, non-configurable or dynamically changing signal followed between the TRP and the UE.
- S101 can be omitted.
- This QCL relationship can be predefined for the protocol.
- the TRP is configured to indicate the spatial information of the second signal to be transmitted by the UE by issuing the first signal according to the predefined QCL relationship.
- the UE receives the first signal, it learns the spatial information of the second signal to be sent according to the predefined QCL relationship. Thereby, the purpose of the UE determining the spatial information of the second signal to be transmitted is achieved.
- the implementation shown in Figure 5c includes:
- the user equipment receives second indication information from the second wireless network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the first signal is used as a reference for spatial information of the second signal, and correspondingly, the second wireless network device Transmitting, by the user equipment, the second indication information;
- the user equipment receives the first signal from the first wireless network device.
- the first wireless network device sends the first signal to the user equipment.
- the user equipment determines spatial information of the second signal to be sent according to the first signal, and sends the second signal to be sent by using spatial information of the second signal.
- the spatial information of the second signal includes an emission angle of the second signal, and an emission angle of the second signal may be determined according to an angle of arrival of the first signal.
- an operation manner for determining spatial information may be as follows: the UE adjusts the weight value of the physical and/or logical antenna, such as adjusting the phase of the analog phase shifter and/or adjusting the precoding matrix of the digital precoding to adjust the weight value. , thereby forming an array of weights.
- the UE may adjust the weights to form a reception weight matrix when receiving the signal.
- the purpose of the UE to form the receive matrix is to optimize signal reception performance, reduce interference, and the like.
- the UE may obtain the receiving spatial information of the first signal according to the energy distribution of the first signal in the air domain, thereby selecting the receiving matrix receiving signal that the UE considers to be the most suitable. For example, receiving the first signal according to the energy distribution of the first signal in the air domain.
- the spatial information may include a correlation matrix obtained from a spatial power spectrum of the signal by a mathematical transformation such as a Fourier transform.
- the weights adjusted when the signal is transmitted form a transmission weight matrix.
- the UE determines spatial information of the second signal according to spatial information of the plurality of signals in the first signal. Specifically, the UE may process the multiple signals in the first signal to obtain spatial information of the second signal, such as the spatial or angular domain or beam domain information corresponding to the spatial information of each signal in the first signal.
- the UE may use the spatial information of the partial signal in the first signal as the useful signal spatial information, and the UE may use the spatial information of the partial signal in the first signal as the interference spatial information, and the UE may obtain the spatial information of the second signal.
- the spatial or angular domain or beam domain information corresponding to the partial signal of the first signal is used as the useful signal spatial information, and the spatial or angular domain or beam domain information corresponding to the partial signal is used as the interference spatial information.
- a useful signal can also be referred to as a channel.
- the UE may use the same or similar spatial information for the multiple signals corresponding to the second signal.
- the first signal includes multiple signals, which may indicate that the first signal includes multiple CSI-RS resources, or a CSI-RS port;
- the second signal includes multiple signals, which may indicate that the first signal includes multiple SRS resources, or SRS port.
- the UE may use the receiving direction of the first signal as a reference for the sending direction of the second signal.
- the UE may adjust the transmit antenna weight such that the transmit weight matrix of the second signal and the receive weight matrix of the first signal have a conjugate matrix relationship.
- the conjugate matrix relationship between the transmission weight matrix of the second signal and the reception weight matrix of the first signal includes: the transmission weight matrix of the second signal is Hermite of the first signal reception weight matrix. Matrix.
- the second wireless network device is the same as or different from the first wireless network device.
- the implementation shown in Figure 5c differs from the implementation described in Figure 5b in that the first indication information in Figure 5b is related to the QCL hypothesis and the second indication information in Figure 5c is not directly related to the QCL hypothesis.
- the first indication information is used as a reference for the spatial information of the second signal by using the second indication information, that is, by adding signaling in the downlink transmission, indicating the reference resource of the uplink transmission of the UE.
- the signaling may be physical layer or higher layer signaling, or may be a combination of high layer signaling and physical layer signaling (such as a high layer signaling notification configuration, physical layer signaling notification activation).
- the first signal may include a non-zero power reference signal, such as a reference signal (such as CSI-RS) for obtaining channel state information, a reference signal for demodulation (such as DMRS), and a reference for beam management. At least one of a signal (such as BMRS).
- the second signal is an uplink signal, and may be an uplink reference signal, such as at least one of a reference signal for demodulation or a reference signal for uplink channel sounding, or an uplink data signal or a control signal.
- the second indication information may be included in configuration information of the first signal.
- the configuration information of the first signal includes a CSI measurement setting field of the first signal, a process domain of the first signal, and resources of the first signal. a (resource) field, an antenna port information field of the first signal, and at least one of a beam information field in which the first signal is located.
- the beam information field in which the first signal is located may include a beam identifier (ID) where the first signal is located, and may further include a beam management RS resource, such as an RS ID and/or an antenna port of the RS.
- the second indication information includes a number of bits, the first signal corresponds to at least one of the several bits, and the at least one bit indicates the first signal is used as the second signal.
- the second indication information may be included in a channel state information measurement setting field of the first signal or a process domain of the first signal.
- the second indication information may be represented as a reference NZP CSI-RS ID field.
- referenceCsirsNZPId this field is defined as a bit string.
- Each bit in the bitstream may sequentially indicate whether the NZP CSI-RS corresponding to one NZP CSI-RS ID is used as a reference for spatial information of the second signal in a predetermined order of the protocol.
- the domain includes a number of NZP CSI-RS ID values, and each ID value represents a resource as a reference for spatial information of the second signal. Since the TRP knows the beam to which the first signal, which is indicated as the second signal, belongs, the relationship between the first signal and the beam can be controlled such that the spatial information of the second signal is controllable.
- the second indication information is a domain having a Boolean value, or the second indication information is only present when referring to the spatial information of the first signal as the second signal.
- the second indication information is included in a resource domain of the first signal, an antenna port information field of the first signal, and at least one of a beam information field in which the first signal is located.
- the first signal is a CSI-RS signal
- the second indication information is included in a resource domain (high-level signaling) of the NZP CSI-RS.
- the second indication information may be represented as an uplink reference activation domain (referenceUplinkEnable).
- the upstream reference activation domain is defined as a Boolean value. For example, when 1 is used, the resource of the NZP CSI-RS where the domain is located may be used as a reference for the spatial information of the second signal. When 0, the resource of the NZP CSI-RS where the domain is located may not be used as the space of the second signal. Reference to information.
- the definition of the uplink reference activation domain may be a domain that needs to be configured (existing).
- the resource of the NZP CSI-RS where the domain is located is used as the spatial information of the second signal. Reference.
- the resource indicating that the NZP CSI-RS of the domain is not used as the reference for the spatial information of the second signal, even if the UE previously uses the NZP CSI-RS resource of the domain as the first
- the resource domain of the NZP CSI-RS may also include a domain that needs to be configured.
- the resource of the NZP CSI-RS where the domain is located is not used as the space of the second signal.
- Reference to information when the domain of the message indicating that the NZP CSI-RS resource of the domain is used as the reference for the spatial information of the second signal does not exist, the resource indicating that the NZP CSI-RS of the domain is located continues as the second.
- the reference to the spatial information of the signal exists until the domain in the message format indicating that the resource of the NZP CSI-RS in which the domain is located is not used as a reference for the spatial information of the second signal.
- the second indication information may also be included in physical layer signaling, such as downlink control information (DCI).
- DCI includes a channel state information setting setting (CSI measurement setting) field of the first signal, a process field of the first signal, a resource field of the first signal, the first signal
- CSI measurement setting channel state information setting setting
- the second indication information may also be included in at least one of the above domains in the DCI when the antenna port information field and at least one of the beam information fields in which the first signal is located.
- the second indication information may also be included in a separate domain, ie, not included in any of the above domains.
- the first signal is beam number information (as included in the beam information domain, or in an independent domain), and the second indication information is included in the DCI as an example.
- the number of bits occupied by the second indication signaling in the DCI is related to the number of beams. For example, if the beam number information is 0-3, the 2 bit information in the DCI can be used to indicate which beam direction of the UE is the reference of the spatial information of the uplink signal to be sent by the UE.
- the first signal is a CSI-RS signal
- the reference of the spatial information of the second signal is a resource ID of the antenna port or the antenna port of the first signal (eg, included in a resource domain of the first signal, or an independent domain)
- the second indication information is included in the DCI as an example.
- the number of bits occupied by the second indication information in the DCI is related to the packet of the antenna port or the packet of the resource ID where the antenna port is located. For example, if the antenna port is 0-3, 0 and 1 are a group, and 2 and 3 are another group, 1 bit in the DCI can be used as the second indication information, and when the second indication information is 1, the antenna port 0 and The signal on 1 is used as a reference for the spatial information of the second signal. When 0, the signal on antenna ports 2 and 3 is used as a reference for the spatial information of the second signal. It can be understood that the specific indication manner of the second indication information may be differently defined according to the actual situation, and the examples herein are not limited.
- the second indication information may also be carried in a domain similar to the first indication information.
- the second indication information may be carried in an SRS request field in the downlink control information.
- the UE is made aware of the first signal as the reference of the spatial information of the second signal, and thus the spatial information of the second signal to be transmitted can be determined.
- the embodiment of the present invention further provides an implicit indication, as shown in Figure 5d, including:
- the user equipment receives a first signal from the first wireless network device, and correspondingly, the first wireless network device sends the first signal to the user equipment.
- the first signal belongs to a signal referenced by spatial information of the second signal.
- the first signal has a characteristic of a signal referenced by spatial information of the second signal.
- the user equipment determines spatial information of the second signal to be sent according to the first signal, and sends the second signal to be sent by using the spatial information.
- the user equipment determines that the first signal belongs to a signal referenced by spatial information of the second signal, and the user equipment determines, according to the first signal, spatial information of the second signal to be sent.
- an operation mode for determining spatial information may be as follows: the UE adjusts the weight value of the physical and/or logical antenna, such as adjusting the phase of the analog phase shifter and/or adjusting the precoding matrix of the digital precoding to adjust the weight value. , thereby forming an array of weights.
- the UE may adjust the weights to form a reception weight matrix when receiving the signal.
- the purpose of the UE to form the receive matrix is to optimize signal reception performance, reduce interference, and the like.
- the UE may obtain the receiving spatial information of the first signal according to the energy distribution of the first signal in the air domain, thereby selecting the receiving matrix receiving signal that the UE considers to be the most suitable. For example, receiving the first signal according to the energy distribution of the first signal in the air domain.
- the spatial information may include a correlation matrix obtained from a spatial power spectrum of the signal by a mathematical transformation such as a Fourier transform.
- the weights adjusted when the signal is transmitted form a transmission weight matrix.
- the UE determines spatial information of the second signal according to spatial information of the plurality of signals in the first signal. Specifically, the UE may process the multiple signals in the first signal to obtain spatial information of the second signal, such as the spatial or angular domain or beam domain information corresponding to the spatial information of each signal in the first signal.
- the UE may use the spatial information of the partial signal in the first signal as the useful signal spatial information, and the UE may use the spatial information of the partial signal in the first signal as the interference spatial information, and the UE may obtain the spatial information of the second signal.
- the spatial or angular domain or beam domain information corresponding to the partial signal of the first signal is used as the useful signal spatial information, and the spatial or angular domain or beam domain information corresponding to the partial signal is used as the interference spatial information.
- a useful signal can also be referred to as a channel.
- the UE may use the same or similar spatial information for the multiple signals corresponding to the second signal.
- the first signal includes multiple signals, which may indicate that the first signal includes multiple CSI-RS resources, or a CSI-RS port;
- the second signal includes multiple signals, which may indicate that the first signal includes multiple SRS resources, or SRS port.
- the UE may use the receiving direction of the first signal as a reference for the sending direction of the second signal.
- the UE may adjust the transmit antenna weight such that the transmit weight matrix of the second signal and the receive weight matrix of the first signal have a conjugate matrix relationship.
- the conjugate matrix relationship between the transmission weight matrix of the second signal and the reception weight matrix of the first signal includes: the transmission weight matrix of the second signal is Hermite of the first signal reception weight matrix. Matrix.
- the user equipment determines that the signal that the first signal belongs to the spatial information of the second signal includes: the user equipment determines that the first signal has a signal referenced by spatial information of the second signal Characteristics.
- the feature of the signal referenced by the spatial information of the second signal includes resource information of the signal, where the resource information includes antenna port information, resource identifier information, channel state information measurement setting identifier information, and process identifier information.
- the signals includes at least one of a downlink control signal, a non-zero power reference signal, and a signal for beam management.
- the spatial information of the second signal includes an emission angle of the second signal, and an emission angle of the second signal may be determined according to an angle of arrival of the first signal.
- the reference (the set containing the reference) used to indicate the spatial information of the second signal is predefined by the protocol and is known by both the TRP and the user equipment.
- the reference (the set containing the reference) used to indicate the spatial information of the second signal cannot be configured.
- the protocol provides that the UE transmits an uplink signal with reference to resources of a channel for transmitting downlink control information, which may be referred to as a downlink control channel, such as a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH).
- a downlink control channel such as a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH).
- the first signal is a downlink control channel
- the resources of the downlink control channel include at least one of an antenna port of a reference signal in the downlink control channel, an analog beam where the downlink control channel is located, and the like.
- the serving cell is sent by the downlink control channel, and the UE needs the uplink feedback as the serving cell. Therefore, the reference beam of the reference downlink control channel can be used as a reference for the spatial information of the uplink signal (the second signal).
- the protocol specifies that the UE should use the following control direction of the control channel to determine the direction of uplink transmission.
- the TRP can be a radio unit (RU).
- the base station When the base station requests the UE to send an uplink signal to the serving cell, the base station only sends the downlink control channel on the serving cell; if the UE is required to send the uplink signal to the serving cell and other coordinated cells, the base station that needs to receive the uplink signal of the UE, The downlink control channel should be sent, and the manner in which the plurality of cells send the downlink control channel can be sent in the form of SFN (single frequency network), or sent in time division.
- SFN single frequency network
- the protocol stipulates that the UE should use a certain downlink antenna port as a reference for uplink transmission. For example, referring to the CSI-RS port, the protocol specifies the port number that the UE should refer to.
- the UE can determine the starting angle of the uplink transmission with the angle of arrival of the received antenna port.
- Such a definition can be coordinated by the TRP on the resource scheduling. That is, only the TRP that needs to receive the uplink signal of the UE can configure the foregoing antenna port as the starting angle reference of the uplink transmission.
- the protocol stipulates that the antenna port 0 of the UE is the reference of the departure angle of the uplink transmission.
- the base station When the base station is configured, if multiple base stations cooperate, the base station that needs to receive the uplink signal of the UE needs to configure the antenna port 0. Otherwise, the configuration of the antenna port 0 should be avoided.
- the base station requires the UE to send an uplink signal to the TRP1.
- the configuration includes at least the antenna port 0 to form a downlink beam.
- the TRP1 and the UE are saved. Information containing the beam pair of antenna port 0.
- TRP1 While TRP1 sends the first signal, it uses antenna port 0 to send, while TRP1 does not use antenna port 0 when transmitting the first signal.
- the TRP2 may not allocate the antenna port 0 in the formed beam.
- the TRP2 configures the antenna port 1 to form a downlink beam scan.
- the UE can be restricted to use the downlink of the beam pair including the antenna port 0 established only by the TRP1.
- the direction of arrival is used to determine the direction of the uplink transmission.
- the beam ID corresponds to a group of downlink TRP transmissions and UE reception beam resources.
- the protocol stipulates that the uplink transmission of the UE should refer to the beam ID resource agreed by the protocol. For example, refer to the uplink transmission of the downlink beam according to the beam ID X.
- the advantage of this mode is that the base station can configure different beam pairs on different time resources.
- the UE can use the aligned beam ID X for uplink transmission in the random access phase, which can be fully utilized. The result of the scan.
- the base station may further configure, in the process of performing downlink beam alignment, only the TRP for receiving the second signal of the UE performs downlink beam alignment in the beam scanning phase by using the resource with the beam ID X.
- the UE can be restricted from using the downlink arrival direction of the beam pair established with the TRP for receiving the second signal of the UE to determine the direction of uplink transmission.
- the protocol stipulates that the UE uses the beam ID of 0 as a reference for uplink transmission.
- the base station When the base station is configured, if multiple base stations cooperate, the base station that needs to receive the uplink signal of the UE needs to configure the beam ID to be 0. Otherwise, the configuration with the beam ID of 0 should be avoided.
- the beam ID can be sent at the upper layer or physical layer signaling.
- the base station requires the UE to send an uplink signal to TRP1 without transmitting an uplink signal to TRP2.
- the protocol stipulates that the UE should determine the spatial information of the uplink transmission by referring to the CSI-RS antenna port in the CSI-RS resource ID specified by the protocol.
- the advantage of this approach is that if the beam scans multiple beams, it is configured in different CSI-RS resources, so that the CSI-RS resources can be used to distinguish the beams.
- This method is applicable to the case where the base station manages one beam direction with one NZP CSI-RS resource.
- Both TRP1 and TRP2 can establish an alignment relationship of the downlink beam pair with the UE. If the base station wants the UE to send the uplink signal only to the TRP1, the TRP1 configures the NZP CSI-RS resource for the UE, the ID of which is 0, and the resource corresponds to at least one antenna port; and when the TRP2 is beam-aligned with the UE, the beam configured by the TRP2 The ID of the NZP CSI-RS resource is different from that of TRP1.
- At least one of the port numbers and time-frequency resource locations of the antenna ports in the two NZP CSI-RS resources configured by TRP1 and TRP2 is different to distinguish the two.
- the corresponding antenna port number, time-frequency resource location, and the like in each NZP CSI-RS can be delivered through high-layer signaling.
- the reference of the spatial information of the uplink transmission herein may also refer to the reference of the uplink analog beam and/or digital beamforming of the UE, and finally may be embodied as a reference of the uplink transmission angle.
- the signal (second signal) for performing uplink transmission includes at least one of an uplink control signal, an uplink data signal, and a reference signal.
- the uplink control signals are, for example, a physical uplink control channel PUCCH, an uplink data signal such as a physical uplink data channel PUSCH, and reference signals such as SRS and DMRS.
- the base station and the UE have the same understanding of the definition, and the UE can only use the downlink resource as the direction reference for the uplink transmission; the downlink resource can only be used by TRP used for uplink reception.
- the method for determining the spatial information of the uplink signal by the UE may be implemented by using at least one of the foregoing 5b, 5c, and 5d, and the beam scanning and measurement process of obtaining the uplink beam pair may be simplified or omitted.
- the UE can learn the airspace relationship between the first signal and the second signal by using at least one of 5b, 5c, and 5d.
- the airspace relationship includes the spatial parameters mentioned in other parts of the application, such as the emission angle (AOA), the main emission angle (Dominant AoA), the average arrival angle (Average AoA), the angle of arrival (AOD), the channel correlation matrix, and the angle of arrival.
- Power angle spread spectrum, Average AoD power angle spread spectrum of the departure angle, transmit channel correlation, receive channel correlation, transmit beamforming, receive beamforming, spatial channel correlation, spatial filter, space One or more of filtering parameters, or spatial receiving parameters, and the like.
- the UE may measure the downlink path loss measurement by using the received power of the first signal on the premise that the UE determines the first signal having the spatial relationship with the second signal to determine The uplink transmission power of the second signal, or using the reception time of the first signal, adjusts the timing advance to determine the transmission time of the second signal.
- the UE may receive the first signal, determine the relationship between the second signal and the first signal, and the UE may perform one or more of the following: determining the corresponding transmission space information of the second signal according to the received spatial information of the first signal. And determining a transmission power of the second signal according to the received power of the first signal, and determining a transmission time of the second signal according to the reception time of the first signal.
- the UE obtains the receiving space information of the downlink signal according to at least one of the methods 5b, 5c, and 5d, and is used to determine the sending spatial information of the uplink signal, so that the UE obtains the downlink signal and the uplink signal. Correspondence between the two. In principle, such a correspondence is to indicate that the UE is transmitting in the appropriate spatial direction in order to facilitate reception by the base station. Uplink signals in different directions sent by the UE experience different path loss and propagation delay in the propagation process. As shown in FIG. 4, TRP1 and TRP2 are two transmission points, which may be transmission points at geographically different locations.
- the UE determines spatial information of the second signal according to the first signal, the principle is that the path of the first signal in spatial propagation is highly correlated with the path of the second signal. Therefore, the path loss and propagation delay experienced by the first signal during propagation can also be considered to be highly correlated with the path loss and propagation delay experienced by the second signal during propagation. Therefore, the correspondence between the first signal and the second signal may also be used by the UE to determine a path loss and a propagation delay of the second signal.
- the first signal includes a non-zero power reference signal.
- the non-zero power reference signal included in the first signal is a non-zero power reference signal for obtaining channel state information, a non-zero power reference signal for demodulation, and a non-zero power At least one of a beam-managed reference signal, a synchronization signal, and a tracking reference signal Tracking RS for time and frequency synchronization tracking.
- the reference signal used to obtain channel state information may be a channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS)
- the reference signal used for demodulation may be a demodulation reference signal. (demodulation reference signal, DMRS).
- the reference signal used to obtain channel state information may be a CSI-RS, or may be another reference signal having a function of obtaining channel state information
- the reference signal used for demodulation may be a DMRS, or may be used for other purposes.
- the reference signal for beam management may be a beam management reference signal (BMRS), and the reference signal for beam management may be used for measurement of large-scale characteristics of the beam, and further Used for beam scanning, alignment and correction, such as by measuring the gain in large-scale characteristics, using the beam pair with the largest gain as a pair of beam pairs.
- BMRS beam management reference signal
- the second signal includes a reference signal.
- the reference signal can be a non-zero power reference signal or a zero power reference signal.
- the reference signal included in the second signal is at least one of a reference signal used for demodulation and a reference signal used for uplink channel measurement.
- the reference signal used for demodulation may be a DMRS
- the reference signal used for uplink channel measurement may be a sounding reference signal (SRS).
- the reference signal used for demodulation may be a DMRS, or may be other reference signals for demodulation functions
- the reference signal used for uplink channel measurement may be SRS, or other uplink channel measurement functions may be used.
- Reference signal may be a DMRS, or may be other reference signals for demodulation functions.
- the UE may determine, according to the received power of the first signal, a transmit power of an uplink signal (including a second signal and/or a second signal related signal), and use the transmit power. To send an upstream signal.
- a transmit power of an uplink signal including a second signal and/or a second signal related signal
- the second signal related signal may include a signal that the intersection of the antenna port (also referred to as a port, port) of the signal and the antenna port of the second signal is non-empty, and the signal may be an uplink data signal, and/or , an uplink control signal, and/or a reference signal different from the second signal.
- the second signal related signal may indicate the relationship with the second signal by means of an explicit indication. If the base station sends signaling to the UE, indicating that the signal is a signal related to the second signal.
- the application provides a communication method, which may include:
- the base station sends, to the UE, information for indicating a transmit power of the first signal.
- the UE receives information indicating a transmit power of the first signal
- the notification manner may be that the base station sends signaling to the UE by using a cell in the RRC, where the signaling indicates a sending power of the first signal;
- the transmit power is a transmit power of the base station side.
- the UE receives the first signal, and measures and obtains the received power of the first signal.
- the UE may perform filtering and smoothing the received power of the first signal within a certain time window to obtain the filtered received power as the received power of the first signal.
- the received power may also be referred to as a CSI-RS reference signal received power (RSRP);
- RSRP CSI-RS reference signal received power
- the UE obtains a path loss of the first signal according to the base station notifying the transmit power of the first signal and the received power of the first signal.
- the received power of the first signal may be a reference signal received power.
- the path loss is equal to a difference obtained by subtracting the received power of the filtered reference signal from the transmit power
- the UE determines an uplink transmit power according to the path loss or an open loop control parameter related to the path loss, and sends an uplink signal by using the uplink transmit power. Wherein, sending the uplink signal by using the uplink transmit power may be optional.
- the uplink signal comprises a signal related to the second signal and/or the second signal.
- the UE obtains a correspondence between the first signal and the signal related to the second signal and/or the second signal.
- the correspondence may be obtained by at least one of steps 5c, 5d, 5b of the embodiment.
- the signal related to the second signal may include a signal that the intersection of the antenna port (also referred to as a port, port) of the signal and the antenna port of the second signal is non-empty, and the signal may be an uplink data signal, and/or uplink A control signal, and/or a reference signal that is different from the second signal.
- the second signal is SRS
- the SRS has only one port, such as port 12
- the PUSCH has 4 ports, such as port 9-12. Since the 1 port of the SRS is one of the 4 ports of the PUSCH, Thus the PUSCH can be considered to be the signal associated with the second signal.
- the second signal is SRS
- the SRS has 2 ports, such as ports 10 and 12
- the PUSCH has 4 ports, such as ports 7, 9, 11 and 12, since the SRS and PUSCH antenna ports have intersections, ports 12, and thus the PUSCH can be considered as the second signal related signal.
- the second signal related signal and the second signal are typically signals transmitted using the same or similar spatial information.
- the second signal related signal may indicate the relationship with the second signal by means of an explicit indication. If the base station sends signaling to the UE, indicating that the signal is a signal related to the second signal.
- the UE may obtain uplink transmit power according to one or more of an open loop control parameter, a closed loop control parameter, a base station desired nominal power density, a signal bandwidth, and a maximum power limit.
- the open loop control parameter may include the foregoing path loss.
- the UE compensates the path loss to the transmit power, so that the uplink signal (such as the second signal) can satisfy the demodulation requirement of the base station when the path loss occurs after the path loss occurs in the propagation process.
- the uplink signal such as the second signal
- the path loss compensation may be embodied as a product of a path loss and a coefficient (also referred to as a compensation coefficient, a path loss compensation coefficient, a factor, a compensation factor, or a path loss compensation factor).
- the coefficients may be non-negative, assigned to the UE by the base station, and the configuration may be cell-specific or UE-specific.
- the coefficient is configured to be 1
- the UE compensates the path loss measured by the first signal to the transmit power of the second signal
- the coefficient is configured to be 0, the UE does not compensate for the path loss; when the coefficient configuration is less than 1
- the UE compensates the path loss measured by the first signal to the transmission power of the second signal.
- the base station configures a compensation coefficient smaller than 1, so that the reception of the second signal can reduce the interference to other users.
- the coefficient is configured to be greater than 1, the UE compensates for the path loss measured by the first signal to the transmit power of the second signal.
- the base station is configured with a compensation coefficient greater than 1, which can compensate for the asymmetry of the base station side beamforming and the UE side beamforming. Specifically, the beamforming signals transmitted and received by the base station are more concentrated in the pattern, and the main lobe is narrower, and the UE has a smaller antenna configuration than the base station, and the received and transmitted beamforming signals are more dispersed in the direction map.
- the UE can receive the narrow beam with a wide beam, and can obtain the downlink signal better, and the uplink base station receives the wide beam transmitted by the UE with the narrow beam, and there will be a part.
- the energy loss therefore, the base station configures the UE with a compensation coefficient greater than 1, which can cause the UE to compensate for the loss due to the above reasons.
- the UE can measure the received power of the first signal, obtain the path loss (PL) of the first signal, and compensate the path loss of the first signal as the path loss of the second signal.
- the UE compensates for the transmission power of the second signal by alpha*PL, where alpha is the path loss compensation factor.
- the UE sends the second signal to the base station to meet the maximum transmit power limit.
- the path loss supplement factor may be specified by the protocol, or locally pre-configured or pre-stored, or may be configured for the base station.
- the UE may determine and/or adjust a transmission time of the uplink signal according to the receiving time of the first signal.
- the uplink signal includes the second signal and/or the second signal related signal.
- the description of the first signal, the second signal, the second signal related signal, and the uplink signal can be referred to the description in the foregoing method.
- the application provides a communication method, which may include:
- the base station sends at least two first signals to the UE.
- the UE receives the first signal from the base station
- the at least two first signals have the same configuration information, and the configuration information may be used to indicate at least one of an antenna port, a time-frequency resource location, and a resource identifier used by the downlink signal.
- the UE determines, according to the at least two first signals, a change value of a propagation delay of the first signal.
- the change value of the propagation delay of the first signal may be a function of the reception time of the at least two first signals, such as a difference between the reception times of the two first signals in the at least two first signals, Or the average of multiple differences.
- the receiving time refers to the time of the received signal determined by the UE, which may be deviated from the time when the signal actually arrives, for example, the time that has been quantized, and the receiving time may also be referred to as the receiving timing.
- the UE determines and/or adjusts a sending time of the uplink signal according to a change value of a propagation delay of the first signal.
- the UE may adjust the timing advance (TA) of the uplink transmission according to a change value (also referred to as a change, an offset) of the propagation delay of the first signal. Since the transmission time of the uplink signal is related to the timing advance amount, the UE is equivalent to adjusting the transmission time of the uplink signal.
- TA timing advance
- the UE sends the uplink signal according to a sending time of the uplink signal.
- the sending time of the uplink signal may be determined by the base station: the signal transmitted by the UE through the UE, such as the preamble preamble, the uplink channel sounding signal SRS, the uplink dedicated signal DMRS, etc., may determine that the signal sent by the UE is The propagation delay experienced in the propagation process; the base station can determine the time adjustment of the uplink signal sent by the UE by measuring the propagation delay of the signal, and the time adjustment can be represented by the uplink timing advance, and the base station uses the timing advance indication to make the signal sent by the UE. After the propagation delay is experienced in the propagation process, the base station can be reached at the time expected by the base station to reduce interference to other UEs in the cell.
- the base station can adjust the time when the UE sends the uplink signal, so that the time-frequency domain and the airspace between the UEs are orthogonal. For multiple UEs that are orthogonal in the time-frequency domain, if the time that the signal sent by the UE arrives at the base station overlaps with other UEs in the multiple UEs, the UEs that should be orthogonal at the same time overlap. Interference. Therefore, the uplink signal sent by the UE is consistent with the expected arrival delay requirement of the base station.
- the base station In the case that the base station notifies the UE of the timing advance by the medium access control (MAC) layer cell, a certain time is required between the transmission of the two MAC layer cells, and the timing advance delivered by the base station is not received.
- the UE may adjust and update the timing advance amount according to the reception time of the downlink signal (the first signal). Specifically, the UE may measure the time difference of the receiving timing of the two first signals, obtain the difference of the downlink signal receiving timing, derive the change of the propagation delay experienced by the downlink signal, and adjust the timing of the uplink sending by using the change of the propagation delay. Advance quantity.
- the UE may send the second signal of the time domain unit corresponding to the sending time according to the sending time of the uplink signal, where the time domain unit may be a subframe, a slot, and a symbol (such as OFDM). Symbol) or one or more of minislots.
- the UE may update the uplink transmission timing advance amount that is maintained or stored.
- the UE may report an uplink transmission timing advance amount, such as an adjusted uplink transmission timing advance amount.
- the UE may report information related to an uplink transmission timing advance amount, where the information is a value corresponding to a function of an uplink transmission timing advance amount.
- the UE may report multiple uplink timing advances, or multiple information related to the uplink transmit timing advance, or information related to multiple uplink transmit timing advances.
- the UE may report a difference, or a function of a difference, of at least two of the plurality of uplink timing advances.
- the function of the difference may refer to a phase offset of the frequency domain corresponding to the difference of the time domain, which may be a function having an FFT/IFFT relationship.
- the UE may report, to the at least one of the first network device and the second network device, an uplink transmission timing advance amount of the uplink signal corresponding to the at least one of the first network device and the second network device, or send the uplink uplink timing Timing advance related information.
- the uplink transmission timing advance amount reported by the UE, or the information related to the uplink transmission timing advance amount has a corresponding relationship with the first signal corresponding to the first network device, and/or the first signal corresponding to the second network device.
- the UE receives the first signals of slot1 and slot2.
- slot 1 is an example of a first time domain unit
- slot 2 is an example of a second time domain unit.
- the UE may perform synchronization timing according to the location of the physical signal, such as the pilot, and know the arrival timing t1 of the first signal of slot1 and the arrival timing t2 of slot2.
- the UE can obtain the change of the downlink signal propagation delay according to the time difference between t1 and t2.
- the UE can obtain the change of the downlink propagation delay of the first signal from slot1 to slot2.
- the base station sends a Timing Advance Command to inform the UE that the uplink signal needs to be advanced.
- the UE should record and maintain the corresponding timing advance TA.
- the UE may adjust the currently maintained TA according to the change of the first signal propagation delay.
- the adjusted TA is the pre-adjusted TA plus the change value of the first signal propagation delay.
- the UE adjusts the TA and transmits a second signal according to the adjusted TA.
- an embodiment of the present invention further provides an apparatus for signal transmission, which may be a wireless device 10.
- the wireless device 10 can correspond to the first wireless network device or the second wireless network device in the above method.
- the first wireless network device may be a base station (such as a TRP) or other devices, which is not limited herein.
- the second wireless network device may be a base station (such as a TRP) or other devices, which is not limited herein.
- the apparatus can include a processor 110, a memory 120, a bus system 130, a receiver 140, and a transmitter 150.
- the processor 110, the memory 120, the receiver 140 and the transmitter 150 are connected by a bus system 130 for storing instructions for executing instructions stored in the memory 120 to control the receiver 140 to receive.
- the signal, and controlling the transmitter 150 to transmit a signal completes the steps of the first wireless network device (such as a base station) or the second wireless network device in the above method.
- the receiver 140 and the transmitter 150 may be the same or different physical entities. When they are the same physical entity, they can be collectively referred to as transceivers.
- the memory 220 may be integrated in the processor 210 or may be provided separately from the processor 210.
- the functions of the receiver 140 and the transmitter 150 can be implemented by a dedicated chip through a transceiver circuit or a transceiver.
- the processor 110 can be implemented by a dedicated processing chip, a processing circuit, a processor, or a general purpose chip.
- a wireless device provided by an embodiment of the present invention may be implemented by using a general-purpose computer.
- the program code that is to implement the functions of the processor 110, the receiver 140 and the transmitter 150 is stored in a memory, and the general purpose processor implements the functions of the processor 110, the receiver 140 and the transmitter 150 by executing the code in the memory.
- the embodiment of the present invention further provides another apparatus for signal transmission, and the apparatus may be a wireless device 20, and the wireless device 20 corresponds to the user equipment in the foregoing method.
- the apparatus can include a processor 210, a memory 220, a bus system 230, a receiver 240, and a transmitter 250.
- the processor 210, the memory 220, the receiver 240 and the transmitter 250 are connected by a bus system 230 for storing instructions for executing instructions stored in the memory 220 to control the receiver 240 to receive.
- the signal, and the transmitter 250 is controlled to send a signal to complete the steps of the user equipment in the above method.
- the receiver 240 and the transmitter 250 may be the same or different physical entities. When they are the same physical entity, they can be collectively referred to as transceivers.
- the memory 220 may be integrated in the processor 210 or may be provided separately from the processor 210.
- the functions of the receiver 240 and the transmitter 250 can be implemented by a dedicated chip through a transceiver circuit or a transceiver.
- the processor 210 can be implemented by a dedicated processing chip, a processing circuit, a processor, or a general purpose chip.
- a wireless device provided by an embodiment of the present invention may be implemented by using a general-purpose computer.
- the program code that is to implement the functions of the processor 210, the receiver 240 and the transmitter 250 is stored in a memory, and the general purpose processor implements the functions of the processor 210, the receiver 240, and the transmitter 250 by executing code in the memory.
- the embodiment of the present invention further provides a communication system, including the foregoing first wireless network device and second wireless network device, and may further include one or more than one of the foregoing user devices.
- the processor 110 or 210 may be a central processing unit ("CPU"), and the processor may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs). , an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), an off-the-shelf programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic device, discrete hardware component, and the like.
- the general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor or any conventional processor or the like.
- the memory 120 or 220 can include read only memory and random access memory and provides instructions and data to the processor 310.
- a portion of the memory may also include a non-volatile random access memory.
- the memory can also store information of the device type.
- the bus system 130 or 230 may include a power bus, a control bus, a status signal bus, and the like in addition to the data bus. However, for the sake of clarity, the various buses are labeled as bus systems in the figure.
- each step of the above method may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor 110 or 210 or an instruction in the form of software.
- the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be directly implemented as a hardware processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
- the software module can be located in a conventional storage medium such as random access memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and the like.
- the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and combines the hardware to complete the steps of the above method. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
- the size of the serial numbers of the above processes does not mean the order of execution, and the order of execution of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not be taken to the embodiments of the present invention.
- the implementation process constitutes any limitation.
- the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other manners.
- the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative.
- the division of the unit is only a logical function division.
- there may be another division manner for example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
- the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, and may be in an electrical, mechanical or other form.
- the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of the embodiment.
- each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
- the functions may be stored in a computer readable storage medium if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a standalone product.
- the technical solution of the present application which is essential or contributes to the prior art, or a part of the technical solution, may be embodied in the form of a software product, which is stored in a storage medium, including
- the instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of the present application.
- the foregoing storage medium includes: a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk, and the like. .
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本申请涉及通信技术领域,特别是涉及一种信号传输方法和装置。The present application relates to the field of communications technologies, and in particular, to a signal transmission method and apparatus.
图1为一个通信系统的结构图,该通信系统中包括多个无线网络设备(如基站)和每个网络设备覆盖下的多个用户设备(user equipment,UE)。1 is a structural diagram of a communication system including a plurality of wireless network devices (such as base stations) and a plurality of user equipments (UEs) covered by each network device.
大规模多输入多输出(Massive Multiple Input Multiple Output,Massive MIMO)能够通过利用更多的空间自由度进一步提高系统容量,成为了新的无线接入技术(New Radio access technology,NR)的关键技术之一。Massive Multiple Input Multiple Output (Massive MIMO) can further increase system capacity by utilizing more spatial degrees of freedom, becoming the key technology of the new Radio Access Technology (NR). One.
在NR中,基于波束的传输成为了一大重点。大规模天线阵列的配置,使得NR中可以形成高分辨率的波束。In NR, beam-based transmission has become a major focus. The configuration of the large-scale antenna array enables high-resolution beams to be formed in the NR.
在上行传输中,UE基于哪个上行发射波束(即上行信号的空间信息或方向信息)进行上行信号的传输,是当前研究中亟待解决的一个问题。In the uplink transmission, the uplink transmission of the uplink signal by the UE (ie, the spatial information or the direction information of the uplink signal) is an urgent problem to be solved in the current research.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本发明实施例提供一种信号传输的方法和装置,以期使UE较高效的确定其待发送的上行信号的空间信息。The embodiment of the invention provides a method and a device for signal transmission, so that the UE can determine the spatial information of the uplink signal to be transmitted more efficiently.
第一方面,本发明实施例提供一种信号传输方法,包括:In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a signal transmission method, including:
用户设备接收来自第一无线网络设备的第一信号;The user equipment receives the first signal from the first wireless network device;
所述用户设备根据所述第一信号确定待发送的第二信号的空间信息并以所述空间信息发送所述待发送的第二信号。Determining, by the user equipment, spatial information of the second signal to be sent according to the first signal, and transmitting the second signal to be sent by using the spatial information.
可选的,所述用户设备接收来自第二无线网络设备的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第二信号与第一信号具有关于空间信息的准共址关系,所述第二无线网络设备与所述第一无线网络设备相同或不同。Optionally, the user equipment receives the first indication information from the second wireless network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the second signal and the first signal have a quasi-co-location relationship with respect to the spatial information. The second wireless network device is the same as or different from the first wireless network device.
可选的,该方法还包括:Optionally, the method further includes:
所述用户设备接收来自第二无线网络设备的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一信号作为第二信号的空间信息的参考,所述第二无线网络设备与所述第一无线网络设备相同或不同。The user equipment receives second indication information from the second wireless network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the first signal is used as a reference for spatial information of the second signal, and the second wireless network device The first wireless network device is the same or different.
可选的,所述用户设备根据所述第一信号确定待发送的第二信号的空间信息包括:Optionally, the determining, by the user equipment, the spatial information of the second signal to be sent according to the first signal includes:
所述用户设备确定所述第一信号属于第二信号的空间信息所参考的信号,所述用户设备根据根据第一信号确定待发送的第二信号的空间信息;Determining, by the user equipment, that the first signal belongs to a signal referenced by spatial information of the second signal, and the user equipment determines, according to the first signal, spatial information of the second signal to be sent according to the first signal;
可选的,所述用户设备确定所述第一信号属于第二信号的空间信息所参考的信号具体可以包括:所述用户设备确定所述第一信号具有所述第二信号的空间信息所参考的信号的特征。Optionally, the determining, by the user equipment, the signal that the first signal belongs to the spatial information of the second signal may include: determining, by the user equipment, that the first signal has spatial information of the second signal. The characteristics of the signal.
可选的,所述第一信号可包含一个或多个信号,所述第二信号/第二信号相关的信号可包含一个或多个信号。Optionally, the first signal may include one or more signals, and the second signal/second signal related signal may include one or more signals.
第二方面,本发明实施例提供一种信号传输方法,包括:In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a signal transmission method, including:
第一无线网络设备向用户设备发送第一信号;The first wireless network device sends the first signal to the user equipment;
所述第一无线网络设备接收来自用户设备的第二信号,其中,第一信号为所述第二信号的空间信息的参考。The first wireless network device receives a second signal from the user equipment, wherein the first signal is a reference to spatial information of the second signal.
可选的,所述第一无线网络设备向所述用户设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第二信号与第一信号具有关于空间信息的准共址关系。Optionally, the first wireless network device sends first indication information to the user equipment, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the second signal and the first signal have a quasi-co-location relationship with respect to spatial information.
可选的,第二无线网络设备向所述用户设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第二信号与第一信号具有关于空间信息的准共址关系。Optionally, the second wireless network device sends the first indication information to the user equipment, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the second signal and the first signal have a quasi-co-location relationship with respect to the spatial information.
可选的,该方法还包括:所述第一无线网络设备向所述用户设备发送第二指示信息,所述所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一信号作为第二信号的空间信息的参考。或者,第二无线网络设备向所述用户设备发送第二指示信息,所述所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一信号作为第二信号的空间信息的参考。Optionally, the method further includes: the first wireless network device sends second indication information to the user equipment, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the first signal is used as spatial information of the second signal. Reference. Or the second wireless network device sends second indication information to the user equipment, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the first signal is used as a reference for spatial information of the second signal.
可选的,所述第一信号为所述第二信号的空间信息的参考包括:Optionally, the reference that the first signal is the spatial information of the second signal includes:
所述第一信号具有所述第二信号的空间信息所参考的信号的特征。The first signal has a characteristic of a signal referenced by spatial information of the second signal.
结合第一方面或第二方面,Combining the first aspect or the second aspect,
可选的,所述第二无线网络设备为所述用户设备的服务无线网络设备,所述第一无线网络设备为所述服务无线网络设备,或者,为除所述服务无线网络设备之外的无线网络设备。Optionally, the second wireless network device is a serving wireless network device of the user equipment, where the first wireless network device is the serving wireless network device, or is other than the serving wireless network device Wireless network device.
可选的,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第二信号与第一信号具有关于空间信息的准共址关系包括:Optionally, the first indication information is used to indicate that the second signal and the first signal have a quasi-co-location relationship with respect to spatial information, including:
所述第一指示信息用于指示第二信号的资源信息与第一信号的资源信息具有关于空间信息的准共址关系,所述资源信息包括资源标识信息,天线端口信息,信道状态信息测量设置标识信息和进程标识信息中的至少一个。The first indication information is used to indicate that the resource information of the second signal and the resource information of the first signal have a quasi-co-location relationship with respect to the spatial information, where the resource information includes resource identification information, antenna port information, and channel state information measurement settings. At least one of identification information and process identification information.
可选的,所述第一信号包括非零功率的参考信号。示例的,所述第一信号所包括的非零功率的参考信号为非零功率的用于获得信道状态信息的参考信号,非零功率的用于解调的参考信号,和非零功率的用于波束管理的参考信号中的至少一种。Optionally, the first signal includes a non-zero power reference signal. For example, the non-zero power reference signal included in the first signal is a non-zero power reference signal for obtaining channel state information, a non-zero power reference signal for demodulation, and a non-zero power. At least one of the beam management reference signals.
可选的,所述第二信号包括参考信号。示例的,所述第二信号所包括的参考信号为用于解调的参考信号和用于上行信道测量的参考信号中的至少一种。Optionally, the second signal includes a reference signal. For example, the reference signal included in the second signal is at least one of a reference signal for demodulation and a reference signal for uplink channel measurement.
可选的,所述第一指示信息包括在用于指示准共址信息的域中;或者,Optionally, the first indication information is included in a domain used to indicate quasi-co-location information; or
所述第一指示信息包括在下行控制信息中,所述下行控制信息中还包括用于指示上行调度相关的信息;或者,The first indication information is included in the downlink control information, and the downlink control information further includes information used to indicate uplink scheduling; or
所述第一指示信息包括在用于指示上行调度相关的信息域中。The first indication information is included in an information field for indicating uplink scheduling related.
可选的,所述第二指示信息包括在所述第一信号的配置信息中。示例的,所述第一信号的配置信息包括所述第一信号的信道状态信息测量设置域,所述第一信号的进程域,所述第一信号的资源域,所述第一信号的天线端口信息域,和所述第一信号所在的波束信息域中的至少一个。Optionally, the second indication information is included in configuration information of the first signal. For example, the configuration information of the first signal includes a channel state information measurement setting field of the first signal, a process domain of the first signal, a resource domain of the first signal, and an antenna of the first signal. a port information field, and at least one of a beam information field in which the first signal is located.
可选的,所述第二指示信息包括若干个比特,所述第一信号对应所述若干个比特中的至少一个比特,所述至少一个比特指示所述第一信号作为所述第二信号的空间信息的参考。这种情况下,所述第二指示信息可以包括在所述第一信号的信道状态信息测量设置域或所述第一信号的进程域中。Optionally, the second indication information includes a number of bits, the first signal corresponds to at least one of the several bits, and the at least one bit indicates the first signal is used as the second signal. Reference to spatial information. In this case, the second indication information may be included in a channel state information measurement setting field of the first signal or a process domain of the first signal.
可选的,所述第二指示信息为一个具有布尔值的域,或者,所述第二指示信息仅在用于指示所述第一信号作为第二信号的空间信息的参考时才存在。这种情况下,所述第二指示 信息可以包括在所述第一信号的资源域,所述第一信号的天线端口信息域,和所述第一信号所在的波束信息域中的至少一个中。Optionally, the second indication information is a domain having a Boolean value, or the second indication information is only present when referring to the spatial information of the first signal as the second signal. In this case, the second indication information may be included in a resource domain of the first signal, an antenna port information field of the first signal, and at least one of a beam information field in which the first signal is located. .
可选的,所述第二信号的空间信息所参考的信号的特征包括信号的资源信息,所述资源信息包括天线端口信息,资源标识信息,信道状态信息测量设置标识信息,和进程标识信息中的至少一个,所述信号包括下行控制信号,非零功率参考信号和用于波束管理的信号中的至少一个。Optionally, the feature of the signal referenced by the spatial information of the second signal includes resource information of the signal, where the resource information includes antenna port information, resource identifier information, channel state information measurement setting identifier information, and process identifier information. At least one of the signals includes at least one of a downlink control signal, a non-zero power reference signal, and a signal for beam management.
可选的,所述第二信号的空间信息包括所述第二信号的发射角,所述第二信号的发射角依据所述第一信号的到达角确定。Optionally, the spatial information of the second signal includes an emission angle of the second signal, and an emission angle of the second signal is determined according to an angle of arrival of the first signal.
可选的,该方法,还包括:Optionally, the method further includes:
终端设备根据所述第一信号的接收功率确定待发送的上行信号的发送功率;Determining, by the terminal device, a transmit power of the uplink signal to be sent according to the received power of the first signal;
终端设备基于所述发送功率发送所述上行信号,所述上行信号包括所述第二信号和/或与所述第二信号相关的信号;和/或,Transmitting, by the terminal device, the uplink signal according to the transmit power, where the uplink signal includes the second signal and/or a signal related to the second signal; and/or,
终端设备根据所述第一信号的接收时间的变化值调整上行发送定时提前量;The terminal device adjusts an uplink transmission timing advance amount according to a change value of the receiving time of the first signal;
终端设备基于调整后的上行发送定时提前量发送上行信号,所述上行信号包括所述第二信号和/或与所述第二信号相关的信号。The terminal device transmits an uplink signal based on the adjusted uplink transmission timing advance, the uplink signal including the second signal and/or a signal related to the second signal.
其中,第二信号相关的信号可以为该信号的天线端口与所述第二信号的天线端口的交集为非空的信号。The second signal related signal may be a signal that the intersection of the antenna port of the signal and the antenna port of the second signal is non-empty.
可选的,所述第一信号可包含一个或多个信号,所述第二信号/第二信号相关的信号可包含一个或多个信号。第三方面,还提供一种用于信号传输的装置,该装置可以为用户设备或用户设备中的芯片,包括处理器、存储器和收发器,Optionally, the first signal may include one or more signals, and the second signal/second signal related signal may include one or more signals. In a third aspect, there is also provided a device for signal transmission, which may be a chip in a user equipment or user equipment, including a processor, a memory, and a transceiver.
所述存储器用于存储指令,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器存储的指令,以控制收发器进行信号的接收和发送,当处理器执行所述存储器存储的指令时,所述用户设备用于完成如第一方面中所描述的用户设备所涉及的任意一种方法。The memory is configured to store instructions for executing the memory stored instructions to control transceivers to receive and transmit signals, and when the processor executes the instructions stored by the memory, the user equipment is used by Any one of the methods involved in the user equipment as described in the first aspect is completed.
第四方面,还提供一种用于信号传输的装置,该装置可以为无线网络设备或无线网络设备中的芯片,包括处理器、存储器和收发器,In a fourth aspect, there is also provided a device for signal transmission, which may be a chip in a wireless network device or a wireless network device, including a processor, a memory, and a transceiver.
所述存储器用于存储指令,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器存储的指令,以控制收发器进行信号的接收和发送,当处理器执行所述存储器存储的指令时,所述无线网络设备用于完成如第二方面中所描述的第一无线网络设备或第二无线网络设备所涉及的任意一种方法。The memory is configured to store instructions, the processor is configured to execute the memory stored instructions to control transceivers to receive and transmit signals, and when the processor executes the instructions stored in the memory, the wireless network device uses Any one of the methods involved in the first wireless network device or the second wireless network device as described in the second aspect.
第五方面,还提供一种用于信号传输的装置,包括一些模块,用于实现前述用户设备所涉及的任意一种方法。具体模块可以和各方法步骤相对应,在此不予赘述。In a fifth aspect, there is also provided an apparatus for signal transmission, comprising a module for implementing any of the methods involved in the foregoing user equipment. The specific modules may correspond to the method steps, and are not described herein.
第六方面,还提供一种用于信号传输的装置,包括一些模块,用于实现前述第一无线网络设备或第二无线网络设备所涉及的任意一种方法。具体模块可以和各方法步骤相对应,在此不予赘述。In a sixth aspect, an apparatus for signal transmission is provided, including a module for implementing any one of the foregoing first wireless network device or second wireless network device. The specific modules may correspond to the method steps, and are not described herein.
第七方面,还提供一种计算机存储介质,用于存储一些指令,这些指令被执行时,可以完成前述用户设备或第一或第二无线网络设备所涉及的任意一种方法。In a seventh aspect, a computer storage medium is provided for storing instructions that, when executed, perform any of the methods involved in the user equipment or the first or second wireless network device.
第八方面,还提供一种通信系统,包括第四方面提供的第一无线网络设备,还可以包括前述第二方面中所涉及的第二无线网络设备。进一步还可以包括前述第三方面提供的用户设备。The eighth aspect, further provides a communication system, including the first wireless network device provided by the fourth aspect, and further includes the second wireless network device involved in the foregoing second aspect. Further, the user equipment provided by the aforementioned third aspect may be further included.
第九方面,还提供一种通信装置,该装置具有实现上述方法方面中第一或第二无线网络设备或用户设备行为的功能,其包括用于执行上述方法方面所描述的步骤或功能相对应的部 件(means)。所述步骤或功能可以通过软件实现,或硬件实现,或者通过硬件和软件结合来实现。In a ninth aspect, there is also provided a communication device having a function for implementing behavior of a first or second wireless network device or user equipment in the above method aspect, comprising corresponding steps or functions for performing the above method aspects Parts (means). The steps or functions may be implemented by software, or by hardware, or by a combination of hardware and software.
在一种可能的设计中,上述通信装置包括一个或多个处理器和收发单元。所述一个或多个处理器被配置为支持所述第一或第二无线网络设备或用户设备执行上述方法中相应的功能。例如,根据第一信号确定待发送的第二信号的空间信息。所述收发单元用于支持所述第一或第二无线网络设备或用户设备与其他设备通信,实现接收/发送功能。例如,接收第一信号,发送第二信号,或,发送第一信号,接收第二信号等。In one possible design, the communication device described above includes one or more processors and transceiver units. The one or more processors are configured to support the first or second wireless network device or user equipment to perform respective functions in the above methods. For example, spatial information of the second signal to be transmitted is determined according to the first signal. The transceiver unit is configured to support the first or second wireless network device or user equipment to communicate with other devices to implement a receiving/transmitting function. For example, receiving the first signal, transmitting the second signal, or transmitting the first signal, receiving the second signal, and the like.
可选的,所述通信装置还可以包括一个或多个存储器,所述存储器用于与处理器耦合,其保存通信装置必要的程序指令和数据。所述一个或多个存储器可以和处理器集成在一起,也可以与处理器分离设置。本申请并不限定。Optionally, the communication device may further include one or more memories for coupling with the processor, which store program instructions and data necessary for the communication device. The one or more memories may be integrated with the processor or may be separate from the processor. This application is not limited.
所述通信装置可以为基站、TRP或是用户设备(也可以为终端设备),所述收发单元可以是收发器,或收发电路。The communication device may be a base station, a TRP or a user equipment (which may also be a terminal device), and the transceiver unit may be a transceiver or a transceiver circuit.
所述通信装置还可以为通信芯片。所述收发单元可以为通信芯片的输入输出电路或者接口。The communication device can also be a communication chip. The transceiver unit can be an input/output circuit or an interface of a communication chip.
本发明实施例提供的方法,装置和系统,通过利用下行接收波束的相关信息确定上行发射波束,可以使得UE较高效的确定其发送的上行信号的空间信息。The method, the device and the system provided by the embodiments of the present invention determine the uplink transmit beam by using the related information of the downlink receive beam, so that the UE can determine the spatial information of the uplink signal that is sent by the UE more efficiently.
为了便于理解,举例的给出了与部分与本申请相关概念的说明以供参考。如下所示:For ease of understanding, the description of some of the concepts related to the present application is given by way of example. As follows:
第三代合作伙伴计划(英文:3 rd generation partnership project,简称3GPP)是一个致力于发展无线通信网络的项目。通常,将3GPP相关的机构称为3GPP机构。 Third Generation Partnership Project (English: 3 rd generation partnership project, referred to as 3GPP) is a wireless communications network dedicated to the development of the project. Generally, a 3GPP related organization is referred to as a 3GPP organization.
无线通信网络,是一种提供无线通信功能的网络。无线通信网络可以采用不同的通信技术,例如码分多址(英文:code division multiple access,简称CDMA)、宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,简称WCDMA)、时分多址(英文:time division multiple access,简称:TDMA)、频分多址(英文:frequency division multiple access,简称FDMA)、正交频分多址(英文:orthogonal frequency-division multiple access,简称:OFDMA)、单载波频分多址(英文:single Carrier FDMA,简称:SC-FDMA)、载波侦听多路访问/冲突避免(英文:Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance)。根据不同网络的容量、速率、时延等因素可以将网络分为2G(英文:generation)网络、3G网络、4G网络或者未来演进网络,如5G网络。典型的2G网络包括全球移动通信系统(英文:global system for mobile communications/general packet radio service,简称:GSM)网络或者通用分组无线业务(英文:general packet radio service,简称:GPRS)网络,典型的3G网络包括通用移动通信系统(英文:universal mobile telecommunications system,简称:UMTS)网络,典型的4G网络包括长期演进(英文:long term evolution,简称:LTE)网络。其中,UMTS网络有时也可以称为通用陆地无线接入网(英文:universal terrestrial radio access network,简称:UTRAN),LTE网络有时也可以称为演进型通用陆地无线接入网(英文:evolved universal terrestrial radio access network,简称:E-UTRAN)。根据资源分配方式的不同,可以分为蜂窝通信网络和无线局域网络(英文:wireless local area networks,简称:WLAN),其中,蜂窝通信网络为调度主导,WLAN为竞争主导。前述的2G、3G和4G网络,均为蜂窝通信网络。本领域技术人员应知,本发明实施例提供的技术方案可以主要应用于4G以后的无线通信网络,例如4.5G或者5G网络,或其他非蜂窝通信网络。为了简洁,本发明实施例有时会将无线通信网络简称为网络。A wireless communication network is a network that provides wireless communication functions. The wireless communication network may use different communication technologies, such as code division multiple access (CDMA), wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA), time division multiple access (English: time) Division multiple access (TDMA), frequency division multiple access (FDMA), orthogonal frequency-division multiple access (OFDMA), single carrier frequency division Multiple Carrier (English: Single Carrier FDMA, SC-FDMA for short), Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance (English: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance). According to the capacity, rate, delay and other factors of different networks, the network can be divided into 2G (English: generation) network, 3G network, 4G network or future evolution network, such as 5G network. A typical 2G network includes a global system for mobile communications/general packet radio service (GSM) network or a general packet radio service (GPRS) network. A typical 3G network is used. The network includes a universal mobile telecommunications system (UMTS) network. A typical 4G network includes a long term evolution (LTE) network. The UMTS network may also be referred to as a universal terrestrial radio access network (UTRAN). The LTE network may also be referred to as an evolved universal terrestrial radio access network (English: evolved universal terrestrial) Radio access network, referred to as E-UTRAN. According to different resource allocation methods, it can be divided into a cellular communication network and a wireless local area network (English: wireless local area networks, WLAN for short), wherein the cellular communication network is dominated by scheduling, and the WLAN is dominant. The aforementioned 2G, 3G and 4G networks are all cellular communication networks. It should be understood by those skilled in the art that the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present invention can be mainly applied to a wireless communication network after 4G, such as a 4.5G or 5G network, or other non-cellular communication networks. For the sake of brevity, embodiments of the present invention sometimes refer to a wireless communication network as a network.
蜂窝通信网络是无线通信网络的一种,其采用蜂窝无线组网方式,在终端设备和网络设备之间通过无线通道连接起来,进而实现用户在活动中可相互通信。其主要特征是终端的移动性,并具有越区切换和跨本地网自动漫游功能。The cellular communication network is a type of wireless communication network, which adopts a cellular wireless networking mode, and is connected between the terminal device and the network device through a wireless channel, thereby enabling users to communicate with each other during activities. Its main feature is the mobility of the terminal, and it has the function of handoff and automatic roaming across the local network.
FDD:频分双工,frequency division duplexFDD: frequency division duplex, frequency division duplex
TDD:时分双工,time division duplexTDD: time division duplex, time division duplex
用户设备(英文:user equipment,简称:UE)是一种终端设备,可以是可移动的终端设备,也可以是不可移动的终端设备。该设备主要用于接收或者发送业务数据。用户设备可分布于网络中,在不同的网络中用户设备有不同的名称,例如:终端,移动台,用户单元,站台,蜂窝电话,个人数字助理,无线调制解调器,无线通信设备,手持设备,膝上型电脑,无绳电话,无线本地环路台,车载终端,无人机设备,智能家居,物联网设备等。该用户设备可以经无线接入网(radio access network,简称:RAN)(无线通信网络的接入部分)与一个或多个核心网进行通信,例如与无线接入网交换语音和/或数据。User equipment (English: user equipment, abbreviated as UE) is a terminal device, which can be a mobile terminal device or a non-mobile terminal device. The device is mainly used to receive or send business data. User equipment can be distributed in the network. User equipments have different names in different networks, such as: terminals, mobile stations, subscriber units, stations, cellular phones, personal digital assistants, wireless modems, wireless communication devices, handheld devices, knees. Upper computer, cordless phone, wireless local loop station, car terminal, drone equipment, smart home, IoT equipment, etc. The user equipment can communicate with one or more core networks via a radio access network (RAN) (access portion of the wireless communication network), such as exchanging voice and/or data with the radio access network.
基站(base station,简称:BS)设备,也可称为基站,是一种部署在无线接入网用以提供无线通信功能的装置。例如在2G网络中提供基站功能的设备包括基地无线收发站(base transceiver station,简称:BTS)和基站控制器(base station controller,简称:BSC),3G网络中提供基站功能的设备包括节点B(NodeB)和无线网络控制器(radio network controller,简称:RNC),在4G网络中提供基站功能的设备包括演进的节点B(evolved NodeB,简称:eNB),在WLAN中,提供基站功能的设备为接入点(access point,简称:AP)。在未来5G新无线(New Radio,简称:NR)中的提供基站功能的设备包括继续演进的节点B(gNB),收发点(transmission and reception point,TRP),传输点(transmission point,TP),或者中继(relay)等。其中,节点B,TRP和TP可以为包含基带处理和射频部分的装置,TRP和TP也可以为射频单元(radio unit,RU)或是远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)。其中,TRP为NG中常用的名称,TP为LTE系统中常用的名称。A base station (BS) device, also referred to as a base station, is a device deployed in a wireless access network to provide wireless communication functions. For example, a device that provides a base station function in a 2G network includes a base transceiver station (BTS) and a base station controller (BSC), and the device that provides the base station function in the 3G network includes the node B ( NodeB) and a radio network controller (RNC), the device providing the function of the base station in the 4G network includes an evolved NodeB (abbreviated as eNB), and in the WLAN, the device providing the function of the base station is Access point (AP). In the future 5G new radio (New Radio, NR for short), the device providing the function of the base station includes a node B (gNB) that continues to evolve, a transmission and reception point (TRP), and a transmission point (TP). Or relay, etc. The Node B, the TRP, and the TP may be a device including a baseband processing and a radio frequency part. The TRP and the TP may also be a radio unit (RU) or a remote radio unit (RRU). Among them, TRP is a commonly used name in NG, and TP is a commonly used name in LTE systems.
无线设备,是指位于无线通信网络中的可以通过无线方式进行通信的设备。该设备可以是无线网络设备,如基站,也可以是用户设备,还可以是其他网元。A wireless device refers to a device that is located in a wireless communication network and that can communicate wirelessly. The device may be a wireless network device, such as a base station, a user equipment, or other network elements.
网络侧设备,是指位于无线通信网络中位于网络侧的设备,可以为接入网网元,如基站或控制器(如有),或者,也可以为核心网网元,还可以为其他网元。A network-side device is a device located on the network side in a wireless communication network, and may be an access network element, such as a base station or a controller (if any), or may be a core network element or other network. yuan.
NR(新无线,new radio),是指新一代无线接入网络技术,可以应用在未来演进网络,如5G网络中。NR (new radio) refers to a new generation of wireless access network technology that can be applied to future evolved networks, such as 5G networks.
无线局域网络(wireless local area networks,简称:WLAN),是指采用无线电波作为数据传送媒介的局域网,传送距离一般只有几十米。Wireless local area networks (WLANs) refer to local area networks that use radio waves as a data transmission medium. The transmission distance is generally only a few tens of meters.
接入点(access point,简称:AP),连接无线网络,亦可以连接有线网络的设备。它能当作中介点,使得有线与无线上网的设备互相连接、传输数据。An access point (AP) that connects to a wireless network and can also connect to a wired network device. It can be used as an intermediary point to connect wired and wireless Internet devices to each other and transmit data.
RRC(radio resource control):无线资源控制RRC (radio resource control): Radio resource control
RRC处理UE和网络侧设备之间控制平面的第三层信息。通常包含以下功能中的至少一项:The RRC processes the third layer information of the control plane between the UE and the network side device. Usually contains at least one of the following features:
广播核心网非接入层提供的信息。RRC负责网络系统信息向UE的广播。系统信息通常情况下按照一定的基本规律重复,RRC负责执行计划、分割和重复。也支持上层信息的广播。The information provided by the non-access stratum of the broadcast core network. The RRC is responsible for broadcasting the network system information to the UE. System information is usually repeated according to certain basic rules, and RRC is responsible for execution planning, segmentation, and repetition. It also supports the broadcast of upper layer information.
将广播信息关联到接入层。RRC负责网络系统信息向UE的广播。系统信息通常情况下按照一定的基本规律重复,RRC负责执行计划、分割和重复。Associate broadcast information to the access layer. The RRC is responsible for broadcasting the network system information to the UE. System information is usually repeated according to certain basic rules, and RRC is responsible for execution planning, segmentation, and repetition.
建立、重新建立、维持和释放在UE和网络侧设备之间的RRC连接。为了建立UE的第一个信号连接,由UE的高层请求建立一个RRC的连接。RRC连接建立过程包括可用小区的重新选择、接入许可控制以及2层信号链路的建立几个步骤。RRC连接释放也是由高层请求,用于拆除最后的信号连接;或者当RRC链路失败的时候由RRC本层发起。如果连接失败,UE会要求重新建立RRC连接。如果RRC连接失败,RRC释放已经分配的资源。The RRC connection between the UE and the network side device is established, re-established, maintained, and released. In order to establish the first signal connection of the UE, an RRC connection is established by the higher layer of the UE. The RRC connection setup procedure includes several steps of reselection of available cells, access grant control, and establishment of a
以上RRC的描述仅为举例,可以随着网络的演进有所变化。The above description of the RRC is merely an example and may vary as the network evolves.
图1为通信系统的示意图(仅示出基站和UE);Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system (only base station and UE are shown);
图2为本发明实施例中描述的基站和UE的内部结构的简化示意图;2 is a simplified schematic diagram of an internal structure of a base station and a UE according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图3a和3b为本发明实施例中描述的发射角和接收角的示意图;3a and 3b are schematic views of an emission angle and a reception angle described in an embodiment of the present invention;
图4为本发明实施例提供的一种DPS场景的示意图;FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a DPS scenario according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图5a,5b,5c和5d为本发明实施例提供的信号传输的方法的流程示意图;5a, 5b, 5c and 5d are schematic flowcharts of a method for signal transmission according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图6为本发明实施例提供的用于信号传输的装置(如无线网络设备)的示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of an apparatus (such as a wireless network device) for signal transmission according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图7为本发明实施例提供的另一用于信号传输的装置(如用户设备)的示意图。FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of another apparatus (such as a user equipment) for signal transmission according to an embodiment of the present invention.
下面将结合本发明实施例中的附图,对本发明实施例中的技术方案进行描述,显然,所描述的实施例仅仅是本申请一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。基于本申请中的实施例,本领域普通技术人员在没有付出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例,都属于本申请保护的范围。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention will be described in conjunction with the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present invention. It is obvious that the described embodiments are only a part of the embodiments of the present application, and not all of the embodiments. All other embodiments obtained by a person of ordinary skill in the art based on the embodiments of the present application without departing from the inventive scope are the scope of the present application.
如本申请所使用的,术语“组件”、“模块”、“系统”等等旨在指代计算机相关实体,该计算机相关实体可以是硬件、固件、硬件和软件的结合、软件或者运行中的软件。例如,组件可以是,但不限于是:在处理器上运行的处理、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行中的线程、程序和/或计算机。作为示例,在计算设备上运行的应用和该计算设备都可以是组件。一个或多个组件可以存在于执行中的过程和/或线程中,并且组件可以位于一个计算机中以及/或者分布在两个或更多个计算机之间。此外,这些组件能够从在其上具有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质中执行。这些组件可以通过诸如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如,来自一个组件的数据,该组件与本地系统、分布式系统中的另一个组件进行交互和/或以信号的方式通过诸如互联网之类的网络与其它系统进行交互)的信号,以本地和/或远程过程的方式进行通信。As used herein, the terms "component," "module," "system," and the like are intended to refer to a computer-related entity, which may be hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or in operation. software. For example, a component can be, but is not limited to being, a process running on a processor, a processor, an object, an executable, a thread in execution, a program, and/or a computer. As an example, both an application running on a computing device and the computing device can be a component. One or more components can reside within a process and/or thread of execution, and a component can be located in a computer and/or distributed between two or more computers. Moreover, these components can execute from various computer readable media having various data structures thereon. These components may be passed, for example, by having one or more data packets (eg, data from one component that interacts with the local system, another component of the distributed system, and/or signaled through, such as the Internet) The network interacts with other systems to communicate in a local and/or remote process.
此外,本申请结合无线设备来描述各个方面,其中,无线设备可以为无线网络设备,也可以为终端设备。该无线网络设备可以为基站,基站可以用于与一个或多个用户设备进行通信,也可以用于与一个或多个具有部分用户设备功能的基站进行通信(比如宏基站与微基站,如接入点,之间的通信);该无线设备还可以为用户设备,用户设备可以用于一个或多个用户设备进行通信(比如D2D通信),也可以用于与一个或多个基站进行通信。用户设备还可以称为用户终端,并且可以包括系统、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动无线终端、移动设备、节点、设备、远程站、远程终端、终端、无线通信设备、无线通信装置或用户代理的功能中的一些或者所有功能。用户设备可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(SIP)电话、智能电话、无线本地环路(WLL)站、个人数字助理(PDA)、膝上型计算机、手持式通信设备、手持 式计算设备、卫星无线设备、无线调制解调器卡、车载设备、智能家居、无人机设备、物联网设备和/或用于在无线系统上进行通信的其它处理设备。基站还可以称为接入点、节点、节点B、演进节点B(eNB)、TRP、TP、gNB或某种其它网络实体,并且可以包括以上网络实体的功能中的一些或所有功能。基站可以通过空中接口与无线终端进行通信。该通信可以通过一个或多个扇区来进行。基站可以通过将所接收的空中接口帧转换成IP分组,来用作无线终端和接入网络的其余部分之间的路由器,其中所述接入网络包括互联网协议(IP)网络。基站还可以对空中接口属性的管理进行协调,并且还可以是有线网络和无线网络之间的网关。举例而言,基站可以为演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved NodeB,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(baseband unit,BBU),无线保真(wireless fidelity,WIFI)系统中的接入点(access point,AP)、无线中继节点、无线回传节点、传输点(transmission and reception point,TRP或者transmission point,TP)等,还可以为5G,如,NR,系统中的gNB,或,传输点(TRP或TP),5G系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板,或者,还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点,如基带单元(BBU),或,分布式单元(DU,distributed unit)等。。在一些部署中,gNB可以包括集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和DU。gNB还可以包括射频单元(radio unit,RU)。CU实现gNB的部分功能,DU实现gNB的部分功能,比如,CU实现无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC),分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层的功能,DU实现无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)和物理(physical,PHY)层的功能。由于RRC层的信息最终会变成PHY层的信息,或者,由PHY层的信息转变而来,因而,在这种架构下,高层信令,如RRC层信令或PHCP层信令,也可以认为是由DU发送的,或者,由DU+RU发送的。可以理解的是,网络设备可以为CU节点、或DU节点、或包括CU节点和DU节点的设备。此外,CU可以划分为接入网RAN中的网络设备,也可以将CU划分为核心网CN中的网络设备,在此不做限制。Moreover, the present application describes various aspects in connection with a wireless device, which may be a wireless network device or a terminal device. The wireless network device may be a base station, the base station may be used to communicate with one or more user equipments, or may be used to communicate with one or more base stations having partial user equipment functions (such as a macro base station and a micro base station, such as Incoming, communication between the two); the wireless device can also be a user equipment, the user equipment can be used for communication (such as D2D communication) of one or more user equipments, and can also be used for communication with one or more base stations. User equipment may also be referred to as user terminals and may include systems, subscriber units, subscriber stations, mobile stations, mobile wireless terminals, mobile devices, nodes, devices, remote stations, remote terminals, terminals, wireless communication devices, wireless communication devices, or Some or all of the features of the user agent. User equipment can be cellular phones, cordless phones, Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phones, smart phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (PDAs), laptop computers, handheld communication devices, handheld computing Devices, satellite wireless devices, wireless modem cards, in-vehicle devices, smart homes, drone devices, IoT devices, and/or other processing devices for communicating over wireless systems. A base station may also be referred to as an access point, a node, a Node B, an evolved Node B (eNB), a TRP, a TP, a gNB, or some other network entity, and may include some or all of the functions of the above network entities. The base station can communicate with the wireless terminal over the air interface. This communication can be done by one or more sectors. The base station can act as a router between the wireless terminal and the rest of the access network by converting the received air interface frame to an IP packet, wherein the access network includes an Internet Protocol (IP) network. The base station can also coordinate the management of air interface attributes and can also be a gateway between the wired network and the wireless network. For example, the base station may be an evolved Node B (eNB), a radio network controller (RNC), a Node B (NB), and a base station controller (BSC). , base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), wireless fidelity (WIFI) system Access point (AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TRP or transmission point, TP), etc., can also be 5G, such as NR, gNB in the system Or, a transmission point (TRP or TP), one or a group of base stations (including multiple antenna panels) in the 5G system, or, alternatively, a network node constituting a gNB or a transmission point, such as a baseband unit (BBU) ), or, distributed unit (DU, distributed unit), etc. . In some deployments, the gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a DU. The gNB may also include a radio unit (RU). The CU implements some functions of the gNB, and the DU implements some functions of the gNB. For example, the CU implements radio resource control (RRC), the function of the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, and the DU implements the wireless chain. The functions of the radio link control (RLC), the media access control (MAC), and the physical (PHY) layer. Since the information of the RRC layer eventually becomes information of the PHY layer or is transformed by the information of the PHY layer, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling or PHCP layer signaling, can also be used in this architecture. It is considered to be sent by the DU or sent by the DU+RU. It can be understood that the network device can be a CU node, or a DU node, or a device including a CU node and a DU node. In addition, the CU may be divided into network devices in the access network RAN, and the CU may be divided into network devices in the core network CN, which is not limited herein.
本发明实施例中以TRP以及TRP和UE之间的通信为例进行描述。可以理解的是,本发明实施例提供的技术方案也可以扩展到UE和UE(如物到物device to device,D2D通信场景)之间,也可以扩展到基站和基站(如宏基站和微基站)之间,还可以扩展到除TRP之外的其他无线网络设备。In the embodiment of the present invention, the TRP and the communication between the TRP and the UE are taken as an example for description. It can be understood that the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present invention may also be extended to between a UE and a UE (such as a device to device, a D2D communication scenario), or may be extended to a base station and a base station (such as a macro base station and a micro base station). Between ), it can also be extended to other wireless network devices except TRP.
本申请将围绕可包括多个设备、组件、模块等的系统来呈现各个方面、实施例或特征。应当理解和明白的是,各个系统可以包括另外的设备、组件、模块等,并且/或者可以并不包括结合附图讨论的所有设备、组件、模块等。此外,还可以使用这些方案的组合。The application will present various aspects, embodiments, or features in a system that can include multiple devices, components, modules, and the like. It is to be understood and appreciated that the various systems may include additional devices, components, modules, etc. and/or may not include all of the devices, components, modules, etc. discussed in connection with the figures. In addition, a combination of these schemes can also be used.
另外,在本发明实施例中,“举例的”一词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请中被描述为“示例”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其它实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言,使用举例的一词旨在以具体方式呈现概念。In addition, in the embodiments of the present invention, the word "exemplary" is used to mean an example, an illustration, or an illustration. Any embodiment or design described as "example" in this application should not be construed as preferred or advantageous over other embodiments or designs. Rather, the term use examples are intended to present concepts in a concrete manner.
本发明实施例中,信息(information),信号(signal),消息(message),信道(channel)有时可以混用,应当指出的是,在不强调其区别时,其所要表达的含义是一致的。“的(of)”,“相应的(corresponding,relevant)”和“对应的(corresponding)”有时可以混用,应当指出的是,在不强调其区别时,其所要表达的含义是一致的。In the embodiment of the present invention, information, signal, message, and channel may sometimes be mixed. It should be noted that the meaning to be expressed is consistent when the difference is not emphasized. "of", "corresponding (relevant)" and "corresponding" can sometimes be mixed. It should be noted that the meaning to be expressed is consistent when the distinction is not emphasized.
本发明实施例中,有时候下标如W 1可能会笔误为非下标的形式如W1,在不强调其区 别时,其所要表达的含义是一致的。 Embodiments of the present invention, as is sometimes the subscript W 1 may form the subject of the non-typo as W1, while not emphasize the difference, to express their meaning is the same.
本发明实施例描述的网络架构以及业务场景是为了更加清楚的说明本发明实施例的技术方案,并不构成对于本发明实施例提供的技术方案的限定,本领域普通技术人员可知,随着网络架构的演变和新业务场景的出现,本发明实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题,同样适用。The network architecture and the service scenario described in the embodiments of the present invention are used to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present invention, and do not constitute a limitation of the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present invention. The technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present invention are equally applicable to similar technical problems.
本发明实施例既可以应用于时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)的场景,也可以适用于频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)的场景。The embodiment of the present invention can be applied to a time division duplex (TDD) scenario or a frequency division duplex (FDD) scenario.
本发明实施例除了可应用于已有的一些通信场景,还可应用于一种以UE为中心的通信场景中。The embodiments of the present invention can be applied to a UE-centric communication scenario, in addition to being applicable to some existing communication scenarios.
可选的,在未来的以UE为中心(UE-centric)的网络中,引入无小区(Non-cell)的网络架构,即在某个特定的区域内部署大量小站,构成一个超级小区(Hyper cell),每个小站为Hyper cell的一个传输点(Transmission Point,TP)或TRP,并与一个集中控制器(controller)相连。Optionally, in a future UE-centric network, a non-cell network architecture is introduced, that is, a large number of small stations are deployed in a specific area to form a super cell ( Hyper cell), each station is a transmission point (TP) or TRP of the Hyper cell, and is connected to a centralized controller.
可选的,在UE-centric系统中,UE可以周期的发送上行测量参考信号,网络侧设备收到UE发送的参考信号后,便可为该UE选择最优的TP和/或TRP集合(子簇,sub-cluster)为其服务。当UE在Hyper cell内移动时,网络侧设备时时为UE选择新的sub-cluster为其服务,从而避免真正的小区切换,实现UE业务的连续性。其中,网络侧设备包括无线网络设备。Optionally, in the UE-centric system, the UE may periodically send an uplink measurement reference signal, and after receiving the reference signal sent by the UE, the network side device may select an optimal TP and/or TRP set for the UE. Cluster, sub-cluster) for its services. When the UE moves within the Hyper cell, the network side device selects a new sub-cluster for the UE to serve, thereby avoiding true cell handover and achieving continuity of the UE service. The network side device includes a wireless network device.
本发明实施例中部分场景以无线通信网络中4G网络的场景为例进行说明,应当指出的是,本发明实施例中的方案还可以应用于其他无线通信网络中,相应的名称也可以用其他无线通信网络中的对应功能的名称进行替代。The scenario in the embodiment of the present invention is described by taking a scenario of a 4G network in a wireless communication network as an example. It should be noted that the solution in the embodiment of the present invention may also be applied to other wireless communication networks, and corresponding names may also be used in other scenarios. The name of the corresponding function in the wireless communication network is replaced.
图1所示为一种通信系统的结构示意图。通信系统可以包括核心网,接入网和终端。在图1中仅示出了接入网所包括的无线网络设备,如基站,和终端,如用户设备。FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system. The communication system can include a core network, an access network, and a terminal. Only the wireless network devices included in the access network, such as base stations, and terminals, such as user equipment, are shown in FIG.
图2所示为基站和UE的内部结构的简化示意图。2 is a simplified schematic diagram of the internal structure of a base station and a UE.
举例的基站可以包括天线阵列,双工器,发信机(TX)和收信机(RX)(有时,TX和RX统称为收发信机TRX),以及基带处理部分。其中,双工器用于实现天线阵列既用于发送信号,又用于接收信号。TX用于实现射频信号和基带信号之间的转换,通常TX可以包括功率放大器PA,数模转换器DAC和变频器,通常RX可以包括低噪放LNA,模数转换器ADC和变频器。基带处理部分用于实现所发送或接收的信号的处理,比如层映射、预编码、调制/解调,编码/译码等,并且对于物理控制信道、物理数据信道、物理广播信道、参考信号等进行分别的处理。Exemplary base stations may include an antenna array, a duplexer, a transmitter (TX), and a receiver (RX) (sometimes, TX and RX are collectively referred to as transceiver TRX), and a baseband processing portion. Among them, the duplexer is used to implement the antenna array for both transmitting signals and receiving signals. TX is used to convert between RF signal and baseband signal. Usually TX can include power amplifier PA, digital-to-analog converter DAC and frequency converter. Usually RX can include low noise amplifier LNA, analog-to-digital converter ADC and frequency converter. The baseband processing section is used to implement processing of transmitted or received signals, such as layer mapping, precoding, modulation/demodulation, encoding/decoding, etc., and for physical control channels, physical data channels, physical broadcast channels, reference signals, etc. Perform separate processing.
在一个示例中,基站还可以包括控制部分,用于进行多用户调度和资源分配、导频调度、用户物理层参数配置等。In an example, the base station may further include a control portion for performing multi-user scheduling and resource allocation, pilot scheduling, user physical layer parameter configuration, and the like.
举例的UE可以包括天线,双工器,发信机(TX)和收信机(RX)(有时,TX和RX统称为收发信机TRX),以及基带处理部分。在图2中,UE具有单天线。可以理解的是,UE也可以具有多天线(即天线阵列)。Exemplary UEs may include an antenna, a duplexer, a transmitter (TX), and a receiver (RX) (sometimes, TX and RX are collectively referred to as transceiver TRX), and a baseband processing portion. In Figure 2, the UE has a single antenna. It can be understood that the UE can also have multiple antennas (ie, an antenna array).
其中,双工器用于实现天线阵列既用于发送信号,又用于接收信号。TX用于实现射频信号和基带信号之间的转换,通常TX可以包括功率放大器PA,数模转换器DAC和变频器,通常RX可以包括低噪放LNA,模数转换器ADC和变频器。基带处理部分用于实现所发送或接收的信号的处理,比如层映射、预编码、调制/解调,编码/译码等,并且对于物理控制信道、物理数据信道、物理广播信道、参考信号等进行分别的处理。Among them, the duplexer is used to implement the antenna array for both transmitting signals and receiving signals. TX is used to convert between RF signal and baseband signal. Usually TX can include power amplifier PA, digital-to-analog converter DAC and frequency converter. Usually RX can include low noise amplifier LNA, analog-to-digital converter ADC and frequency converter. The baseband processing section is used to implement processing of transmitted or received signals, such as layer mapping, precoding, modulation/demodulation, encoding/decoding, etc., and for physical control channels, physical data channels, physical broadcast channels, reference signals, etc. Perform separate processing.
在一个示例中,UE也可以包括控制部分,用于请求上行物理资源、计算下行信道对应的信道状态信息(CSI)、判断下行数据包是否接收成功等等。In an example, the UE may further include a control part, configured to request an uplink physical resource, calculate channel state information (CSI) corresponding to the downlink channel, determine whether the downlink data packet is successfully received, or the like.
目前的5G研究中,TRP侧和UE侧的波束对齐是一个重要的问题。In the current 5G study, beam alignment on the TRP side and the UE side is an important issue.
波束是指,通过天线(端口)上的权值调整,使得发送和/或接收的信号的能量有一定的方向性(即聚集在一定的方向上),这样的聚集称为波束。其中,对应于发送的信号的为发射波束,对于接收的信号的为接收波束。发射波束和接收波束可以称为一个波束对。Beam refers to the adjustment of the weight on the antenna (port) so that the energy of the transmitted and/or received signals has a certain directivity (ie, concentrated in a certain direction). Such aggregation is called a beam. Wherein, corresponding to the transmitted signal is a transmit beam, and for the received signal is a receive beam. The transmit beam and the receive beam can be referred to as a beam pair.
从NR讨论的进程来看,NR中的波束分为TRP侧和UE侧,TRP和UE分别都可以在基带通过预编码形成数字波束和在射频通过移相器形成模拟波束。由于NR中将可能应用Massive MIMO技术,大量的天线可以使得形成的波束分辨度很高,波束很窄。这样的话,波束的方向性更加明显。因此对发射波束和接收波束的对齐(简称波束对齐)有了一定的要求。From the process of the NR discussion, the beam in the NR is divided into the TRP side and the UE side, and the TRP and the UE can respectively form a digital beam by precoding at the baseband and an analog beam by the phase shifter at the radio frequency. Since Massive MIMO technology will be applied in NR, a large number of antennas can make the formed beam have high resolution and the beam is narrow. In this case, the directivity of the beam is more pronounced. Therefore, there is a certain requirement for the alignment of the transmit beam and the receive beam (referred to as beam alignment).
当前波束对齐的讨论主要集中在下行,大体上是通过波束扫描来获得若干个波束对。下行的波束扫描可以为:TRP形成并发射多个下行波束(也称为下行发射波束),UE接收多个下行波束,在UE接收多个下行波束的过程中,UE可以通过移相器的相位切换和/或基带中天线端口的权值调整形成多个下行接收波束(也称为下行波束),这样通过对多个下行发射波束和多个下行接收波束的扫描和测量,确定最佳的下行波束对,其中,下行波束对包括了一对下行发射波束(TRP侧)和下行接收波束(UE侧)。进而确定下行发射波束和下行接收波束。The discussion of current beam alignment is mainly focused on the downlink, which is generally obtained by beam scanning to obtain several beam pairs. The downlink beam scanning may be: the TRP forms and transmits multiple downlink beams (also referred to as downlink transmitting beams), and the UE receives multiple downlink beams. In the process of the UE receiving multiple downlink beams, the UE may pass the phase of the phase shifter. The weighting of the antenna ports in the handover and/or baseband is adjusted to form a plurality of downlink receive beams (also referred to as downlink beams), so that the optimal downlink is determined by scanning and measuring multiple downlink transmit beams and multiple downlink receive beams. A beam pair, wherein the downlink beam pair includes a pair of downlink transmit beams (TRP side) and a downlink receive beam (UE side). The downlink transmit beam and the downlink receive beam are further determined.
类似的,通过UE发射多个上行波束(也称为上行发送波束),TRP接收多个上行波束,并在TRP接收多个上行波束的过程中,TRP通过移相器的相位切换和/或基带中天线端口的权值调整可以形成多个上行接收波束,这样通过对多个上行发射波束(也称为上行波束)和多个上行接收波束(也称为上行波束)的扫描和测量,可以确定最佳的上行波束对,其中,上行波束对包括了一对上行发射波束(UE侧)和上行接收波束(TRP侧)。Similarly, the UE transmits multiple uplink beams (also referred to as uplink transmit beams), the TRP receives multiple uplink beams, and the TRP passes phase shift and/or baseband of the phase shifter during the TRP receiving multiple uplink beams. The weight adjustment of the middle antenna port may form multiple uplink receive beams, which may be determined by scanning and measuring multiple uplink transmit beams (also referred to as uplink beams) and multiple uplink receive beams (also referred to as uplink beams). The best uplink beam pair, wherein the uplink beam pair includes a pair of uplink transmit beams (UE side) and an uplink receive beam (TRP side).
但这种上行波束对的确定方式需要UE和TRP之间的多次扫描和测量。在本申请中,提出了一种上行发射波束的确定方式,即利用波束,的空间互易性,将上行发射波束的发射角(angle of departure,AoD)定义为可由下行接收波束的到达角(angle of arrival,AoA)推断得到,即上行发射波束的发射角可以依据下行接收波束的到达角确定,具体可以根据上行发射波束的发射角与下行接收波束的到达角之间的关系确定。举例的,这种关系可以是上行发射波束的发射角与下行接收波束的到达角相同。可以理解的是,这种关系也可以为其他的情况。举例的,这种关系可以由协议预先规定,预先存储在UE侧,也可以由TRP进行配置,在此不予限定。这样,UE确定下行接收波束后,即可确定相应的上行发射波束。其中,图3a和3b中给出了发射角和到达角的示意图。其中,到达角(AoA,angle of arrival)为信号到达的方向与某一方向(如水平方向)的夹角,发射角,也称出发角(AoD,angle of departure),为信号出发的方向与某一方向(如水平方向)的夹角。对于多个径的情况,可以参考UE具体去测量估计AoA/AoD的算法,在此不详细描述,图3a和3b中示出的是以多个径中最强径为例的情况。However, the determination of such uplink beam pairs requires multiple scans and measurements between the UE and the TRP. In the present application, a method for determining an uplink transmit beam is proposed, that is, by using the spatial reciprocity of a beam, an angle of departure (AoD) of an uplink transmit beam is defined as an angle of arrival of a downlink receive beam ( The angle of arrival (AoA) is inferred, that is, the transmission angle of the uplink transmit beam may be determined according to the arrival angle of the downlink receive beam, and may be determined according to the relationship between the transmit angle of the uplink transmit beam and the arrival angle of the downlink receive beam. For example, the relationship may be that the transmission angle of the uplink transmit beam is the same as the arrival angle of the downlink receive beam. It can be understood that this relationship can also be other situations. For example, the relationship may be pre-defined by the protocol, and may be pre-stored on the UE side or configured by the TRP, which is not limited herein. In this way, after the UE determines the downlink receive beam, the corresponding uplink transmit beam can be determined. Among them, a schematic diagram of the emission angle and the angle of arrival is given in Figures 3a and 3b. The angle of arrival (AoA) is the angle between the direction of arrival of the signal and a certain direction (such as the horizontal direction), and the angle of emission, also called the angle of departure (AoD), is the direction of the signal. The angle between a certain direction (such as the horizontal direction). For the case of multiple paths, the algorithm for estimating the estimated AoA/AoD may be specifically referred to by the UE, and is not described in detail herein. The case where the strongest path among the plurality of paths is taken as an example is shown in FIGS. 3a and 3b.
此外,TRP侧的上行接收波束的到达角也可以与其下行发射波束的发射角相关,即,TRP侧的上行接收波束的到达角也可以依据其下行发射波束的发射角确定,具体的,可以依据TRP侧的上行接收波束的到达角与其下行发射波束的发射角的关系来确定。举例的,这种关系可 以是下行发射波束的发射角与上行接收波束的到达角相同。可以理解的是,这种关系也可以为其他的情况。举例的,这种关系可以由协议预先规定,预先存储在TRP侧,也可以由TRP进行配置,在此不予限定。In addition, the angle of arrival of the uplink receiving beam on the TRP side may also be related to the transmission angle of the downlink transmitting beam. That is, the angle of arrival of the uplink receiving beam on the TRP side may also be determined according to the transmission angle of the downlink transmitting beam. The relationship between the angle of arrival of the uplink receive beam on the TRP side and the transmission angle of its downlink transmit beam is determined. For example, the relationship may be that the transmission angle of the downlink transmit beam is the same as the arrival angle of the uplink receive beam. It can be understood that this relationship can also be other situations. For example, the relationship may be pre-defined by the protocol, and may be pre-stored on the TRP side or configured by the TRP, which is not limited herein.
这样,可以以一种较简单的方式确定上行发射波束的发送角和上行接收波束的到达角。In this way, the transmission angle of the uplink transmit beam and the angle of arrival of the uplink receive beam can be determined in a relatively simple manner.
但是,在NR通信中,会存在UE接收多个下行波束的情况,这种情况下,UE具有多个下行接收波束的到达角,UE如何确定上行发射波束的发射角参考哪个下行接收波束的到达角,或是,UE如何确定在通过扫描和测量已获得的上行发射波束中选择哪一个,这都需要进一步的探讨。其中,举例的,UE接收多个下行波束的场景,包括单基站的MIMO应用,或是由于一些通信场景,如CoMP场景,如联合传输(Joint tranmission,JT),动态点选择(dynamic point selection,DPS),或是由于多面板通信等。如图4所示,是一种DPS场景的示意图。在这种场景下,UE在一个时刻仅从一个TRP接收下行数据,如物理下行共享信道PDSCH上的信号,也就是,UE动态地接收来自多个TRP的波束。但是,UE的上行信道状态信息的反馈应保持与服务小区的通信,而不是发送给协作小区。因此,如果UE基于正在传输的下行数据的波束方向来决定上行发送的方向,会导致需要接收上行信道状态信息的服务小区收不到信号的问题。因而这种场景下,需要指示UE上行发送应参考的下行资源,以期避免上行发送的波束增益损耗甚至通信中断的问题。However, in the NR communication, there may be a case where the UE receives multiple downlink beams. In this case, the UE has multiple arrival angles of the downlink reception beams, and how does the UE determine the transmission angle of the uplink transmission beam and which downlink reception beam arrives? Angle, or how the UE determines which of the uplink transmit beams that have been obtained by scanning and measuring, which needs further discussion. For example, the scenario in which the UE receives multiple downlink beams includes a single base station MIMO application, or due to some communication scenarios, such as a CoMP scenario, such as joint tranmission (JT), dynamic point selection (dynamic point selection, DPS), or due to multi-panel communication. As shown in FIG. 4, it is a schematic diagram of a DPS scenario. In this scenario, the UE receives downlink data from only one TRP at a time, such as a signal on the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH, that is, the UE dynamically receives beams from multiple TRPs. However, the feedback of the UE's uplink channel state information should remain in communication with the serving cell, rather than being sent to the cooperating cell. Therefore, if the UE determines the direction of the uplink transmission based on the beam direction of the downlink data being transmitted, the problem that the serving cell that needs to receive the uplink channel state information cannot receive the signal. Therefore, in this scenario, the UE needs to instruct the UE to uplink transmit downlink resources to be referenced, so as to avoid the problem of beam gain loss or even communication interruption of uplink transmission.
一种可能的方式是,UE和TRP通过上行波束扫描和测量,形成多个上行波束对。TRP下发待UE发送的上行信号的资源信息,如参考信号的天线端口号等,和/或,待TRP接收的上行信号的上行接收波束的资源信息,这样,UE根据这些信息即可确定其要发送的上行信号所对应的上行发射波束,和/或,TRP根据这些信息即可确定其要接收的上行信号所对应的上行接收波束。One possible way is that the UE and the TRP form a plurality of uplink beam pairs by uplink beam scanning and measurement. The TRP sends the resource information of the uplink signal to be sent by the UE, such as the antenna port number of the reference signal, and/or the resource information of the uplink receiving beam of the uplink signal to be received by the TRP, so that the UE can determine the information according to the information. The uplink transmit beam corresponding to the uplink signal to be transmitted, and/or the TRP can determine the uplink receive beam corresponding to the uplink signal to be received according to the information.
本发明实施例提供另一种可能的方式,UE根据从TRP接收到的下行信号,确定其要发送的上行信号所对应的上行发射波束。The embodiment of the present invention provides another possible manner, the UE determines, according to the downlink signal received from the TRP, an uplink transmit beam corresponding to the uplink signal to be sent.
本发明实施例中提供的这种方式既可以应用在TRP和UE具有下行波束对,不通过扫描和测量获得上行波束对的情况下,也可以应用在TRP和UE具有下行波束对而且通过扫描和测量获得上行波束对的情况下。The method provided in the embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the TRP and the UE having the downlink beam pair, and the uplink beam pair is not obtained by scanning and measuring, and can also be applied to the TRP and the UE having the downlink beam pair and scanning and The measurement is obtained in the case of obtaining an uplink beam pair.
一种可能的方案,如图5a所示,包括:A possible solution, as shown in Figure 5a, includes:
S1,用户设备接收来自第一无线网络设备的第一信号;S1. The user equipment receives the first signal from the first wireless network device.
S2,所述用户设备根据所述第一信号确定待发送的第二信号的空间信息并以所述空间信息发送所述待发送的第二信号。S2. The user equipment determines spatial information of the second signal to be sent according to the first signal, and sends the second signal to be sent by using the spatial information.
可选的,第二信号的空间信息包括所述第二信号的发射角(出发角),所述第二信号的发射角依据所述第一信号的到达角确定。Optionally, the spatial information of the second signal includes an emission angle (starting angle) of the second signal, and an emission angle of the second signal is determined according to an angle of arrival of the first signal.
可以理解的是,所述第二信号的发射角依据所述第一信号的到达角确定可以包括:It can be understood that determining the emission angle of the second signal according to the arrival angle of the first signal may include:
第二信号的发射角与第一信号的到达角相同,或者,The emission angle of the second signal is the same as the angle of arrival of the first signal, or
第二信号的发射角与第一信号的到达角具有一定的对应关系,或者,The emission angle of the second signal has a certain correspondence with the angle of arrival of the first signal, or
依据第一信号的到达角,从已有的上行波束对中选择上行波束的发射角作为第二信号的发射角。比如,选择与所述第一信号的到达角最接近的上行波束的发射角作为第二信号的发射角。According to the angle of arrival of the first signal, the transmission angle of the uplink beam is selected from the existing uplink beam pairs as the transmission angle of the second signal. For example, the emission angle of the uplink beam closest to the angle of arrival of the first signal is selected as the emission angle of the second signal.
可选的,可以有如图5b,5c和5d中任意一个所示的实现方式,具体描述如下:Optionally, there may be implementations as shown in any one of Figures 5b, 5c and 5d, which are described as follows:
如图5b所示的实现方式,包括:The implementation shown in Figure 5b includes:
S101,第二无线网络设备向用户设备发送第一指示信息,相应的,用户设备接收来自第二无线网络设备的第一指示信息,其中,所述第一指示信息用于指示第二信号与第一信号具有关于空间信息的准共址关系。S101, the second wireless network device sends the first indication information to the user equipment, and correspondingly, the user equipment receives the first indication information from the second wireless network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the second signal and the first A signal has a quasi co-location relationship with respect to spatial information.
其中,第二信号与第一信号具有关于空间信息的准共址关系可以指:Wherein, the quasi-co-location relationship of the second signal and the first signal with respect to the spatial information may refer to:
第二信号的空间信息可以通过第一信号的空间信息推知,其中,空间信息可以包括接收到达角(Angle of arrival,AoA,也可称为到达角或接收角)、发射出发角(Angle of departure,AoD,也可称为出发角或发射角)、到达角扩展(Angle of arrival spread)、出发角扩展(Angle of departure spread)和相关性(spatial correlation)中至少一个。The spatial information of the second signal can be inferred by the spatial information of the first signal, wherein the spatial information can include an Angle of Arrival (AoA, also referred to as an angle of arrival or a reception angle), and an Angle of departure (Angle of departure) , AoD, which may also be referred to as a departure angle or an emission angle, at least one of an Angle of arrival spread, an Angle of departure spread, and a spatial correlation.
可选的,第二信号与第一信号具有关于空间信息的准共址关系包括:Optionally, the second signal and the first signal have a quasi-co-location relationship with respect to the spatial information, including:
第二信号的资源信息与第一信号的资源信息具有关于空间信息的准共址关系,也即,第二信号的资源信息的空间信息可以依据第一信号的资源信息的空间信息推知,其中,所述资源信息包括资源标识信息,天线端口信息,信道状态信息测量设置标识信息和进程标识信息中的至少一个。The resource information of the second signal and the resource information of the first signal have a quasi-co-location relationship with respect to the spatial information, that is, the spatial information of the resource information of the second signal can be inferred according to the spatial information of the resource information of the first signal, where The resource information includes at least one of resource identification information, antenna port information, channel state information measurement setting identification information, and process identification information.
可选的,所述第一指示信息可以通过高层信令,也可以通过物理层信令进行下发。Optionally, the first indication information may be sent by using the high layer signaling or the physical layer signaling.
可选的,所述第一信号包括非零功率的参考信号。Optionally, the first signal includes a non-zero power reference signal.
可选的,所述第一信号所包括的非零功率的参考信号为非零功率的用于获得信道状态信息的参考信号,非零功率的用于解调的参考信号,非零功率的用于波束管理的参考信号,同步信号,和,用于时间、频率同步跟踪的跟踪参考信号Tracking RS中的至少一种。举例的,在LTE系统中,用于获得信道状态信息的参考信号可以为信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information-reference signal,CSI-RS),用于解调的参考信号可以为解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)。在NR系统,用于获得信道状态信息的参考信号可以为CSI-RS,也可以为其他具有获得信道状态信息功能的参考信号,用于解调的参考信号可以为DMRS,也可以为其他具有用于解调功能的参考信号,而用于波束管理的参考信号可以为波束管理参考信号(beam management reference signal,BMRS),用于波束管理的参考信号可以用于波束的大尺度特性的测量,进而用于波束的扫描,对齐和修正,比如通过测量大尺度特性中的增益,将增益最大的波束对作为一对波束对。Optionally, the non-zero power reference signal included in the first signal is a non-zero power reference signal for obtaining channel state information, a non-zero power reference signal for demodulation, and a non-zero power At least one of a beam-managed reference signal, a synchronization signal, and a tracking reference signal Tracking RS for time and frequency synchronization tracking. For example, in the LTE system, the reference signal used to obtain channel state information may be a channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS), and the reference signal used for demodulation may be a demodulation reference signal. (demodulation reference signal, DMRS). In the NR system, the reference signal used to obtain channel state information may be a CSI-RS, or may be another reference signal having a function of obtaining channel state information, and the reference signal used for demodulation may be a DMRS, or may be used for other purposes. For the reference signal of the demodulation function, the reference signal for beam management may be a beam management reference signal (BMRS), and the reference signal for beam management may be used for measurement of large-scale characteristics of the beam, and further Used for beam scanning, alignment and correction, such as by measuring the gain in large-scale characteristics, using the beam pair with the largest gain as a pair of beam pairs.
可选的,所述第二信号包括参考信号。该参考信号可以为非零功率的参考信号,也可以为零功率的参考信号。Optionally, the second signal includes a reference signal. The reference signal can be a non-zero power reference signal or a zero power reference signal.
可选的,所述第二信号所包括的参考信号为用于解调的参考信号和用于上行信道测量的参考信号中的至少一种。举例的,在LTE系统中,用于解调的参考信号可以为DMRS,用于上行信道测量的参考信号可以为探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)。在NR系统中,用于解调的参考信号可以为DMRS,也可以为其他具有用于解调功能的参考信号;用于上行信道测量的参考信号可以为SRS,也可以其他具有上行信道测量功能的参考信号。Optionally, the reference signal included in the second signal is at least one of a reference signal used for demodulation and a reference signal used for uplink channel measurement. For example, in the LTE system, the reference signal used for demodulation may be a DMRS, and the reference signal used for uplink channel measurement may be a sounding reference signal (SRS). In the NR system, the reference signal used for demodulation may be a DMRS, or may be other reference signals for demodulation functions; the reference signal used for uplink channel measurement may be SRS, or other uplink channel measurement functions may be used. Reference signal.
一种可选的方式中,所述第一指示信息可以包括在用于指示准共址信息的域中,如LTE系统中的物理下行共享信道资源元素映射和准共址指示域(PDSCH RE Mapping and Quasi-Co-Location Indicator field,PQI)。In an optional manner, the first indication information may be included in a domain for indicating quasi-co-location information, such as a physical downlink shared channel resource element mapping and a quasi-co-location indication domain (PDSCH RE Mapping) in an LTE system. And Quasi-Co-Location Indicator field, PQI).
LTE在第三代合作伙伴计划(英文:3rd Generation Partnership Project,简称:3GPP)版本11中,为了支持多点协作传输,引入了天线端口准共址,在LTE系统中简称为QCL(Quasi Co-Located)的概念。从QCL的天线端口发送出的信号会经过相同的大尺度衰落。大尺度衰落包括时延扩展、多普勒扩展、多普勒频移、平均信道增益和平均时延。为了支持终端设备 (即用户设备)从服务TRP(服务小区所属的TRP)通过PDCCH接收下行控制信息,从协作TRP(协作小区所属的TRP)通过PDSCH接收下行数据,版本11中定义了一种新的传输模式,即传输模式10(TM10,transmission mode 10),主要引入了前述的物理下行共享信道资源元素映射以及准共址指示(PQI),用来指示下行数据是从哪一个TRP发送的,其对应的信道大尺度特征与哪一组天线端口一致。这样,UE根据PQI,结合无线资源控制(英文:Radio Resource Control,简称:RRC)信令配置的PDSCH映射消息元素,可以得知解调该下行数据需要使用哪一组天线端口对应的无线信道参数。In version 3 of the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (English: 3rd Generation Partnership Project, 3GPP), LTE introduced the antenna port quasi-co-location, which is referred to as QCL (Quasi Co- in the LTE system). Located) concept. Signals sent from the QCL's antenna port will pass the same large-scale fading. Large-scale fading includes delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average channel gain, and average delay. In order to support the terminal device (ie, the user equipment) to receive the downlink control information from the serving TRP (the TRP to which the serving cell belongs) through the PDCCH, the downlink data is received from the cooperative TRP (the TRP to which the coordinated cell belongs) through the PDSCH, and a new type is defined in the version 11 The transmission mode, that is, the transmission mode 10 (TM10), mainly introduces the foregoing physical downlink shared channel resource element mapping and quasi-co-location indication (PQI), which is used to indicate which TRP the downlink data is sent from. The corresponding large-scale characteristics of the channel are consistent with which set of antenna ports. In this way, the UE can know the radio channel parameters corresponding to which group of antenna ports are used to demodulate the downlink data according to the PQI and the PDSCH mapping message element configured by the Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling. .
具体的,对于配置了TM10的UE,有两种QCL假设,QCL类型(Type)A和Type B。Type A中,服务小区所有的端口(port)都是QCL的。Type B中,PDSCH天线端口和高层参数指示的非零功率的信道状态信息参考信号(NZP CSI-RS)资源对应的天线端口是QCL的。协议中的描述摘录如下:Specifically, for a UE configured with TM10, there are two QCL assumptions, QCL type (Type) A and Type B. In Type A, all ports of the serving cell are QCL. In Type B, the antenna port corresponding to the non-zero power channel state information reference signal (NZP CSI-RS) resource indicated by the PDSCH antenna port and the upper layer parameter is QCL. An excerpt from the description in the agreement is as follows:
-Type A:The UE may assume the antenna ports 0–3,7–30 of a serving cell are quasi co-located(as defined in[3])with respect to delay spread,Doppler spread,Doppler shift,and average delay.-Type A: The UE may assume the antenna ports 0–3,7–30 of a serving cell are quasi co-located(as defined in[3])with respect to delay spread,Doppler spread,Doppler shift,and average delay .
-Type B:The UE may assume the antenna ports 15–30 corresponding to the CSI-RS resource configuration identified by the higher layer parameter qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPId-r11(defined in subclause 7.1.9)and the antenna ports 7–14 associated with the PDSCH are quasi co-located(as defined in[3])with respect to Doppler shift,Doppler spread,average delay,and delay spread.-Type B: The UE may assume the antenna ports 15–30 corresponding to the CSI-RS resource configuration identified by the higher layer parameter qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPId-r11(defined in subclause 7.1.9) and the antenna ports 7 –14 associated with the PDSCH are quasi co-located(as defined in[3])with respect to Doppler shift,Doppler spread,average delay,and delay spread.
其中,类型A:UE可以假设服务小区的天线端口0-3,7-30是关于时延扩展,多普勒扩展,多普勒频移和平均时延的QCL。Wherein, Type A: The UE can assume that the antenna ports 0-3, 7-30 of the serving cell are QCLs for delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift and average delay.
类型B:UE可以假设由高层参数qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPID-r11配置的CSI-RS资源对应的天线端口15-30和与物理下行共享信道(PDSCH)相关的天线端口7-14是关于时延扩展,多普勒扩展,多普勒频移和平均时延的QCL。Type B: The UE can assume that the antenna port 15-30 corresponding to the CSI-RS resource configured by the higher layer parameter qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPID-r11 and the antenna port 7-14 associated with the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) are related. Delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift and average delay QCL.
其中,天线端口15-30为CSI-RS的天线端口,而天线端口7-14为PDSCH的天线端口,DMRS天线端口通常与PDSCH一致。因而,类型B中也就指示了与DMRS天线端口具有QCL关系的CSI-RS天线端口。The antenna port 15-30 is an antenna port of the CSI-RS, and the antenna port 7-14 is an antenna port of the PDSCH, and the DMRS antenna port is generally consistent with the PDSCH. Thus, Type B also indicates the CSI-RS antenna port that has a QCL relationship with the DMRS antenna port.
举例的,可以通过高层信令,如无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)信令将若干组可能的参数集进行下发(也可称为配置),比如,在LTE系统中,将4组可能的参数集进行下发。通过物理层信令,如DCI信令,指示4组可能的参数集中需被激活的一组。For example, a plurality of sets of possible parameter sets may be sent (also referred to as configurations) by high-level signaling, such as radio resource control (RRC) signaling. For example, in an LTE system, four groups are used. A possible set of parameters is issued. Through physical layer signaling, such as DCI signaling, a group of four sets of possible parameter sets to be activated is indicated.
具体的,LTE系统中,上述用于指示4组可能的参数集中需被激活的一组的域为PDSCH RE Mapping and Quasi-Co-Location Indicator(PQI)域。Specifically, in the LTE system, the foregoing group for indicating that the four sets of possible parameter sets need to be activated is a PDSCH RE Mapping and Quasi-Co-Location Indicator (PQI) domain.
前述通过高层信令下发的参数集包括的参数之一为用于指示与所述参数集所配置的PDSCH资源具有QCL关系的CSI-RS资源的标识,如qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPId-r11这个域。One of the parameters included in the parameter set delivered by the high-layer signaling is an identifier for indicating a CSI-RS resource having a QCL relationship with a PDSCH resource configured by the parameter set, for example, qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPId-r11 This domain.
而CSI-RS资源的标识(identity或identifier,ID)指示了一组CSI-RS的资源配置。The identity of the CSI-RS resource (identity or identifier, ID) indicates the resource configuration of a group of CSI-RSs.
比如CSI-RS资源的标识可以为csi-RS-ConfigNZPId,相应的,每个CSI-RS资源的配置包括该CSI-RS资源的天线端口数(如antennaPortsCount-r11信元(也可以成为域)),资源配置(如resourceConfig-r11信元),子帧配置(如subframeConfig-r11信元),加扰标识(如scramblingIdentity-r11信元),以及与该CSI-RS资源具有QCL关系的CRS(公共参考信号,common reference signal)(如qcl-CRS-Info-r11信元)中的一个或多个。For example, the identifier of the CSI-RS resource may be csi-RS-ConfigNZPId. Correspondingly, the configuration of each CSI-RS resource includes the number of antenna ports of the CSI-RS resource (for example, an antennaPortsCount-r11 cell (which may also be a domain)) , resource configuration (such as resourceConfig-r11 cell), subframe configuration (such as subframeConfig-r11 cell), scrambling identifier (such as scramblingIdentity-r11 cell), and CRS with QCL relationship with the CSI-RS resource (public) One or more of the reference signal (common reference signal) (eg, qcl-CRS-Info-r11 cell).
举例的,一组CSI-RS的资源配置所包括的信元可以如下(3GPP TS36.211):For example, the cells included in the resource configuration of a group of CSI-RSs may be as follows (3GPP TS 36.211):
前述PQI域可以通过DCI(下行控制信息,downlink control information)format(格式)2D进行下发,举例的,PQI域可以占2比特(bit)。The foregoing PQI domain may be delivered by DCI (downlink control information) format 2D. For example, the PQI domain may occupy 2 bits.
举例的,PQI 2bit的含义可以如下表所示:For example, the meaning of PQI 2bit can be as follows:
这样,UE通过接收到的Quasi-Co-Location Indicator field信令,可以获知所使用的参数集是哪一个,根据参数集中关于CSI-RS中的配置,可以得知CSI-RS端口和CRS端口的关系,进而可以获知接收该参数集所对应的PDSCH时做解调,频偏纠正等所应参照的CRS端口。In this way, the UE can know which one of the parameter sets used by using the received Quasi-Co-Location Indicator field signaling, and can know the CSI-RS port and the CRS port according to the configuration in the CSI-RS in the parameter set. The relationship, in turn, can be used to know the CRS port to be referred to for demodulation, frequency offset correction, etc. when receiving the PDSCH corresponding to the parameter set.
具体的,时延(delay)扩展,多普勒扩展,多普勒频移和平均时延均为大尺度参数,一个天线端口,如天线端口A和另一个天线端口,如天线端口B,关于大尺度参数的QCL是指:通过天线端口A得到的(conveyed)信道大尺度参数可以推知(infer)天线端口B的信道大尺度参数。大尺度参数还可以包括平均增益(Average gain)。进一步的,还可以包括空间信息(也称空间参数,Spatial parameter)。其中,空间信息可以包括接收到达角(Angle of arrival),出发角(Angle of departure,也可称为发射角)、到达角扩展(Angle of arrival spread)、出发角扩展(Angle of departure spread)、空间相关性(spatial correlation)中至少一个。其中,空间相关性可以与信号的相关矩阵相关。信号的相关矩阵中的元素用于描述两个天线单元之间的相关性,天线单元可以为天线振子或天线面板,也可以为其他天线单元,在此不予限定。Specifically, delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift and average delay are large-scale parameters, one antenna port, such as antenna port A and another antenna port, such as antenna port B, The QCL of the large-scale parameter means that the large-scale parameter of the channel of the antenna port B can be inferred by the large-scale parameter of the channel obtained by the antenna port A. Large scale parameters can also include Average gain. Further, spatial information (also referred to as a spatial parameter) may also be included. The spatial information may include an Angle of Arrival, an Angle of departure (also referred to as an emission angle), an Angle of arrival spread, an Angle of departure spread, At least one of spatial correlations. Among them, the spatial correlation can be related to the correlation matrix of the signal. An element in the correlation matrix of the signal is used to describe the correlation between the two antenna elements. The antenna unit may be an antenna element or an antenna panel, or may be another antenna unit, which is not limited herein.
随着TRP天线多面板的出现,QCL还可以应用于多面板传输的情况。With the advent of multi-panel TRP antennas, QCL can also be applied to multi-panel transmissions.
在本申请中,可以在QCL假设中进一步包括:上述第二信号与第一信号关于空间信息的QCL。In the present application, the QCL hypothesis may further include: a QCL of the foregoing second signal and the first signal with respect to spatial information.
举例的,以定义CSI-RS和上行SRS的QCL关系,空间信息为出发角和到达角为例,在QCL假设中Type B的描述可以进一步包括:For example, to define a QCL relationship between a CSI-RS and an uplink SRS, where spatial information is a departure angle and an angle of arrival, the description of Type B in the QCL hypothesis may further include:
The UE may assume the antenna ports 15-30 corresponding to the CSI-RS resource configuration identified by the higher layer parameter qcl-Csirs-UplinkSRS and the antenna ports40-43 are quasi co-located with respect to Angle of arrival/Angle of departure.The UE may assume the antenna ports 15-30 corresponding to the CSI-RS resource configuration identified by the higher layer parameter qcl-Csirs-UplinkSRS and the antenna ports 40-43 are quasi co-located with respect to Angle of arrival/Angle of departure .
即,UE可以假设由高层参数qcl-Csirs-UplinkSRS所指示的CSI-RS资源对应的天线端口15-30和天线端口40-43是关于到达角和出发角的QCL。That is, the UE can assume that the antenna ports 15-30 and antenna ports 40-43 corresponding to the CSI-RS resources indicated by the higher layer parameter qcl-Csirs-UplinkSRS are QCLs regarding the angle of arrival and the departure angle.
其中,天线端口40-43可以为上行SRS端口。The antenna ports 40-43 may be uplink SRS ports.
具体的,第二无线网络设备可以通过高层信令,如RRC信令,下发用于数据传输的多组参数集,举例的,每组参数集可以包括的内容如前提到的参数集的内容(也可以不包括前述参数集中的部分内容,在此不予限定),进一步的,还包括用于指示与第二信号具有QCL关系的第一信号的资源信息,如资源标识。举例的,第二信号为上行SRS,第一信号为CSI-RS,则可以在每组参数集中包括CSI-RS的资源标识。由于每组参数集中还包括与PDSCH具有QCL关系的CSI-RS的资源标识,因而,根据与PDSCH具有QCL关系的CSI-RS的资源标识和与上行SRS具有QCL关系的CSI-RS资源标识的组合(即联合编码),可以确定参数集的个数,进而得到具有不同的所述组合的参数集的索引信息。比如,与PDSCH具有QCL关系的CSI-RS的资源标识可以有4个,与上行SRS具有QCL关系的CSI-RS资源标识也可以有4个,则具有不同的所述组合的参数集有16个。Specifically, the second wireless network device may send multiple sets of parameter sets for data transmission by using high-layer signaling, such as RRC signaling. For example, each set of parameter sets may include content such as the content of the pre-determined parameter set. (It may not include part of the foregoing parameter set, which is not limited herein). Further, it further includes resource information, such as a resource identifier, for indicating a first signal having a QCL relationship with the second signal. For example, if the second signal is an uplink SRS and the first signal is a CSI-RS, the resource identifier of the CSI-RS may be included in each set of parameter sets. Since each set of parameter sets further includes a resource identifier of a CSI-RS having a QCL relationship with the PDSCH, a combination of a resource identifier of a CSI-RS having a QCL relationship with a PDSCH and a CSI-RS resource identifier having a QCL relationship with an uplink SRS (ie, joint coding), the number of parameter sets can be determined, and the index information of the parameter sets having different combinations can be obtained. For example, there may be four resource identifiers of a CSI-RS having a QCL relationship with a PDSCH, and four CSI-RS resource identifiers having a QCL relationship with an uplink SRS, and 16 parameter sets having different combinations of the combinations. .
进一步的,第二无线网络设备可以向UE发送用于指示准共址信息的域,如PQI,来向所述UE发送前述第一指示信息。Further, the second wireless network device may send a field, such as a PQI, for indicating the quasi co-location information to the UE, to send the foregoing first indication information to the UE.
可选的,该用于指示准共址信息的域可以通过DCI来下发。Optionally, the domain used to indicate the quasi-co-location information may be delivered by using DCI.
可选的,该用于指示准共址信息的域也可以通过高层信令来下发。Optionally, the domain used to indicate the quasi-co-location information may also be delivered by using high layer signaling.
举例的,前述具有不同的所述组合的参数集有16个,则可以通过一个4bit的域来指示UE所使用的参数集,即第一指示信息为该4bit的域,该域可以指示准共址信息。UE根据来自第二无线网络设备的这4bit的域,进而获知该参数集中所包括的与上行SRS具有QCL关系的CSI-RS的资源标识信息。此外,由于该参数集中还包括了与PDSCH资源具有QCL关系的CSI-RS的资源标识信息,因而,UE还可以获知与上行SRS具有QCL关系的PDSCH资源的信息,如DMRS天线端口的信息。所述16个参数集、4bit域中的数字16、4为举例,也可以为其他值,在此不予限定。For example, if there are 16 parameter sets having different combinations of the foregoing, the parameter set used by the UE may be indicated by a 4-bit domain, that is, the first indication information is the 4-bit domain, and the domain may indicate the quasi-common Address information. The UE learns the resource identification information of the CSI-RS having the QCL relationship with the uplink SRS included in the parameter set according to the 4-bit domain from the second radio network device. In addition, since the parameter set further includes resource identification information of a CSI-RS having a QCL relationship with the PDSCH resource, the UE may also obtain information about a PDSCH resource having a QCL relationship with the uplink SRS, such as information of a DMRS antenna port. The 16 parameter sets and the numbers 16 and 4 in the 4 bit field are exemplified, and may be other values, which are not limited herein.
其中,用于数据传输的多组参数集可以包括在高层信令的域中,一组参数集可以包括以下参数中的至少一种:The plurality of sets of parameter sets for data transmission may be included in a domain of higher layer signaling, and the set of parameters may include at least one of the following parameters:
小区参考信号的端口个数,小区参考信号的端口号,小区参考信号的频域位置指示,小区参考信号的时域位置指示,The number of ports of the cell reference signal, the port number of the cell reference signal, the frequency domain position indication of the cell reference signal, and the time domain position indication of the cell reference signal,
同步信号的资源指示(所述资源包括时域资源、频域资源、或波束资源中的至少一种,可选的,指示可以为索引或标识),同步信号所在的时域单元指示(其中,时域单元可以为子帧、时隙、OFDM符号、或迷你时隙中的一个或多个,示例的,该指示可以为索引或标识),a resource indication of the synchronization signal (the resource includes at least one of a time domain resource, a frequency domain resource, or a beam resource, optionally, the indication may be an index or an identifier), and the time domain unit indication in which the synchronization signal is located (where The time domain unit may be one or more of a subframe, a time slot, an OFDM symbol, or a minislot, which may be an index or an identifier, for example,
多媒体广播多播单频网(multimedia broadcast multicast service single frequency network,MBSFN)配置信息(示例的,配置信息可以为MBSFN传输的时域单元格式,其用于指示MBSFN传输所占据的时域单元,该时域单元可以为子帧、时隙、符号或迷你时隙中的一种或多种),Multimedia broadcast multicast service single frequency network (MBSFN) configuration information (example, the configuration information may be a time domain unit format of MBSFN transmission, which is used to indicate a time domain unit occupied by MBSFN transmission, The time domain unit can be one or more of a subframe, a time slot, a symbol, or a mini time slot)
零功率的用于获得信道状态的信号CSI-RS的资源指示,a resource indication of a zero-power signal CSI-RS for obtaining a channel state,
下行数据信道(如物理下行共享信道PDSCH)的资源位置指示(示例的,资源位置可以为PDSCH的时域、频域资源位置,其中,时域位置可以为PDSCH所占据的时域资源,如PDSCH起始和/或结束的OFDM符号,频域位置可以指PDSCH所占据的频域资源),The resource location indication of the downlink data channel (such as the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH) (example, the resource location may be a time domain of the PDSCH, a frequency domain resource location, where the time domain location may be a time domain resource occupied by the PDSCH, such as a PDSCH The starting and/or ending OFDM symbols, the frequency domain location may refer to the frequency domain resources occupied by the PDSCH),
用于指示下行DMRS的QCL关系的非零功率的用于获得信道状态的信号CSI-RS的资源指示(所述资源指示可以用于指示CSI-RS导频的时频位置和/或序列,示例的,该资源指示可以为CSI-RS的资源标识),用于指示下行DMRS的QCL关系的大尺度参数指示(所述指示用于指示与CSI-RS有QCL关系的大尺度参数,示例的,该指示可以为用于指示CSI-RS和DMRS的QCL关系的大尺度参数类型指示,还可以为用于指示CSI-RS和DMRS的QCL关系的大尺度参数指示),A resource indication of a signal CSI-RS for obtaining a channel state for indicating a non-zero power of a QCL relationship of a downlink DMRS (the resource indication may be used to indicate a time-frequency position and/or sequence of CSI-RS pilots, an example The resource indication, which may be a resource identifier of the CSI-RS, is used to indicate a large-scale parameter indication of a QCL relationship of the downlink DMRS (the indication is used to indicate a large-scale parameter having a QCL relationship with the CSI-RS, for example, The indication may be a large-scale parameter type indication for indicating a QCL relationship between the CSI-RS and the DMRS, and may also be a large-scale parameter indication for indicating a QCL relationship between the CSI-RS and the DMRS,
用于指示上行SRS的QCL关系的非零功率的用于获得信道状态的信号CSI-RS的资源标识指示,用于指示上行SRS的QCL关系的非零功率的用于获得信道状态的信号CSI-RS的端口指示,用于指示上行SRS的QCL关系的非零功率的用于获得信道状态的信号CSI-RS的时频位置指示,用于指示上行SRS的QCL关系的下行DMRS的资源指示,用于指示上行SRS的QCL关系的下行DMRS的端口(组)指示,用于指示上行SRS的QCL关系的下行DMRS的时频位置指示,用于指示上行SRS的QCL关系的同步信号的资源指示(如同步信号所在的时域单元指示,同步信号所在的资源编号等),用于指示上行SRS的QCL关系的大尺度参数指示。A resource identification indication of a signal CSI-RS for obtaining a channel state for indicating a non-zero power of a QCL relationship of an uplink SRS, a signal CSI for obtaining a channel state for indicating a non-zero power of a QCL relationship of an uplink SRS The port indication of the RS, the time-frequency position indication of the signal CSI-RS for obtaining the channel state of the non-zero power indicating the QCL relationship of the uplink SRS, and the resource indication of the downlink DMRS for indicating the QCL relationship of the uplink SRS, a port (group) indication of a downlink DMRS indicating a QCL relationship of the uplink SRS, a time-frequency position indication of a downlink DMRS for indicating a QCL relationship of the uplink SRS, and a resource indication for indicating a synchronization signal of a QCL relationship of the uplink SRS (eg, The time domain unit in which the synchronization signal is located indicates the resource number of the synchronization signal, etc., and is used to indicate a large-scale parameter indication of the QCL relationship of the uplink SRS.
本申请中,QCL的定义可以参考5G中QCL的定义,在新无线NR系统中,对QCL的定义为:从QCL的天线端口发送出的信号会经过相同的大尺度衰落,其中,大尺度衰落包括以下参数中的一项或多项:时延扩展,多普勒扩展,多普勒频移,平均信道增益,平均时延和空域参数,空域参数可以为发射角(AOA),主发射角(Dominant AoA),平均到达角(Average AoA),到达角(AOD),信道相关矩阵,到达角的功率角度扩展谱,平均出发角(Average AoD),出发角的功率角度扩展谱,发射信道相关性,接收信道相关性,发射波束成型,接收波束成型,空间信道相关性,滤波器,空间滤波参数,或,空间接收参数等中的一项或多项。In the present application, the definition of QCL can refer to the definition of QCL in 5G. In the new wireless NR system, the definition of QCL is: the signal transmitted from the antenna port of QCL will undergo the same large-scale fading, wherein large-scale fading It includes one or more of the following parameters: delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average channel gain, average delay and airspace parameters. The airspace parameter can be the emission angle (AOA), the main emission angle. (Dominant AoA), Average AoA, Angle of Arrival (AOD), Channel Correlation Matrix, Power Angle Spread Spectrum of Angle of Arrival, Average AoD, Power Angle Spread Spectrum of Departure Angle, Transmit Channel Correlation One or more of Sex, Receive Channel Correlation, Transmit Beamforming, Receive Beamforming, Spatial Channel Correlation, Filters, Spatial Filter Parameters, or Spatial Receive Parameters.
本申请中,指示可以为标识或索引,在此不予限定。In this application, the indication may be an identifier or an index, which is not limited herein.
本申请中,时域单元可以为子帧、时隙、OFDM符号、或迷你时隙中的一个或多个。In this application, the time domain unit may be one or more of a subframe, a time slot, an OFDM symbol, or a mini-slot.
这样,通过所述第一指示信息,UE可以确定所述多组参数集中被激活的参数集,进而获得相应的参数,比如,获知接收PDSCH的DMRS与CSI-RS的QCL关系和发送SRS和第一信号的QCL关系。In this way, the UE may determine, by using the first indication information, a parameter set that is activated in the multiple sets of parameter sets, and obtain corresponding parameters, for example, knowing the QCL relationship between the DMRS receiving the PDSCH and the CSI-RS, and transmitting the SRS and the first The QCL relationship of a signal.
另一种可选的方式中,所述第一指示信息包括在下行控制信息中,所述下行控制信息中还包括用于指示上行调度相关的信息;其中,上行调度相关的信息包括:上行时频映射位置和调制编码方式中的至少一种。In another optional manner, the first indication information is included in the downlink control information, where the downlink control information further includes information for indicating uplink scheduling related information, where the uplink scheduling related information includes: when uplinking At least one of a frequency mapping position and a modulation coding mode.
这种方式下,第一指示信息不包括在用于指示QCL信息的域,如PQI,中,而是通过其他比特(域)来承载第一指示信息,比如通过上行QCL指示域(Uplink Quasi-Co-Location Indicator)来承载,该域包括若干bit,这若干bit的二进制值或者这若干bit中的每一位(bitmap的形式)可以指示与第二信号具有QCL关系的第一信号的信息。这若干bit的位数和与第二信号具有QCL关系的第一信号的信息的个数有关。比如,第一信号为CSI-RS,且第一信号的资源标识为4个,则这若干bit的位数可以为2,其中的“00”“01”“10”“11”分别指示4个CSI-RS资源标识中的一个,或者,这若干bit的位数可以为4,则每一bit对应这4个CSI-RS资源标识中的一个,可选的,一bit为1可以表示相应的CSI-RS资源标识被激活,为0可以表示相应的 CSI-RS资源标识未被激活。In this manner, the first indication information is not included in the domain for indicating the QCL information, such as PQI, but the other indication information is carried by other bits (domains), such as by the uplink QCL indication field (Uplink Quasi- Co-Location Indicator), the field includes a number of bits, and the binary value of the several bits or each of the bits (in the form of a bitmap) may indicate information of the first signal having a QCL relationship with the second signal. The number of bits of these bits is related to the number of pieces of information of the first signal having a QCL relationship with the second signal. For example, if the first signal is a CSI-RS, and the resource identifier of the first signal is four, the number of bits of the several bits may be two, where “00”, “01”, “10”, “11” respectively indicate 4 One of the CSI-RS resource identifiers, or the number of bits of the number of bits may be four, and each bit corresponds to one of the four CSI-RS resource identifiers. Optionally, one bit of 1 may indicate corresponding The CSI-RS resource identifier is activated, and 0 indicates that the corresponding CSI-RS resource identifier is not activated.
可选的,所述上行QCL指示域可以是专用于指示第二信号与第一信号的QCL关系的域,或者,所述上行QCL指示域可以包括在SRS请求域中(如SRS请求域中的字段)。所述SRS请求域是基站在下行控制信息中发送给UE的SRS请求,该SRS请求域用于触发UE发送SRS,或,用于指示UE发送上行信号的闭环功率控制参数。Optionally, the uplink QCL indication field may be a domain dedicated to indicating a QCL relationship between the second signal and the first signal, or the uplink QCL indication domain may be included in an SRS request domain (such as in an SRS request domain). Field). The SRS request field is an SRS request sent by the base station to the UE in the downlink control information, where the SRS request field is used to trigger the UE to send the SRS, or the closed loop power control parameter used to instruct the UE to send the uplink signal.
可选的,所述第一指示信息,比如上行QCL指示域,可以是承载在DCI中,是专用于指示第二信号与第一信号的QCL关系的域,或者,所述第一指示信息可以与其他指示信息联合指示,如第一指示信息可以与SRS请求的指示信息联合指示。具体地,所述SRS请求域是基站在下行控制信息中发送给UE的SRS请求,该SRS请求域用于触发UE发送SRS,可选地,该信息域还可以用于指示UE发送上行信号的闭环功率控制参数。具体地,第一无线网络设备可以向UE发送下行控制信息,所述下行控制信息中可以携带SRS请求域,用于指示UE发送SRS的信息,所述SRS请求域还可以用于第一指示信息,如所述SRS请求域的部分字段可以表示第一指示信息,或者所述SRS请求域的指示比特表达可以表示第一指示信息。Optionally, the first indication information, such as an uplink QCL indication field, may be a domain that is carried in the DCI and is dedicated to indicating a QCL relationship between the second signal and the first signal, or the first indication information may be A joint indication with other indication information, such as the first indication information, may be jointly indicated with the indication information of the SRS request. Specifically, the SRS request field is an SRS request that is sent by the base station to the UE in the downlink control information, where the SRS request field is used to trigger the UE to send the SRS. Optionally, the information field may also be used to indicate that the UE sends the uplink signal. Closed loop power control parameters. Specifically, the first radio network device may send downlink control information to the UE, where the downlink control information may carry an SRS request field, where the SRS request field is used to indicate that the UE sends the SRS information, where the SRS request domain may also be used for the first indication information. The partial field of the SRS request field may represent the first indication information, or the indication bit representation of the SRS request field may represent the first indication information.
可选的,所述第一指示信息可以包括在用于指示上行调度相关的信息域中。Optionally, the first indication information may be included in an information field used to indicate uplink scheduling related.
S102,第一无线网络设备向用户设备发送第一信号,相应的,用户设备接收来自第一无线网络设备的第一信号;其中,第一无线网络设备可以与第二无线网络设备相同,即,为同一个无线网络设备,也可以不同。S102. The first wireless network device sends a first signal to the user equipment. Correspondingly, the user equipment receives the first signal from the first wireless network device. The first wireless network device may be the same as the second wireless network device, that is, It can also be different for the same wireless network device.
可选的,第一无线网络设备可以为用户设备的服务小区所属的无线网络设备,也可以为用户设备的协作小区所属的无线网络设备;第二无线网络设备可以为用户设备的服务小区所属的无线网络设备。Optionally, the first wireless network device may be a wireless network device to which the serving cell of the user equipment belongs, or may be a wireless network device to which the coordinated cell of the user equipment belongs; the second wireless network device may be a service cell to which the user equipment belongs. Wireless network device.
S103,用户设备根据所述第一信号确定所述第二信号的空间信息,并以所述第二信号的空间信息向所述第一无线网络设备发送所述第二信号。S103. The user equipment determines spatial information of the second signal according to the first signal, and sends the second signal to the first wireless network device by using spatial information of the second signal.
可选的,第二信号的空间信息包括所述第二信号的发射角,所述第二信号的发射角依据所述第一信号的到达角确定。Optionally, the spatial information of the second signal includes an emission angle of the second signal, and an emission angle of the second signal is determined according to an angle of arrival of the first signal.
进一步的,第一无线网络设备还可以根据所述第一信号确定第二信号的接收到达角,并以所述接收到达角接收所述第二信号。Further, the first wireless network device may further determine a reception angle of arrival of the second signal according to the first signal, and receive the second signal by using the reception angle of arrival.
进一步地,一种确定空间信息的操作方式可以如下:UE调整物理和/或逻辑天线的加权值,如调整模拟移相器的相位和/或调整数字预编码的预编码矩阵等来调整加权值,从而形成权值阵列。UE在接收信号时可调整权值形成接收权值矩阵。UE形成接收矩阵的目的是最优化信号接收性能,减低干扰等。UE可根据第一信号在空域的能量分布获得第一信号的接收空间信息,从而选择UE认为最合适的接收矩阵接收信号,示例的,根据第一信号在空域的能量分布获得第一信号的接收空间信息可以包括通过数学变换(如傅里叶变换)由信号的空间功率谱获得信号的相关矩阵。发送信号时调整的权值形成发送权值矩阵。Further, an operation mode for determining spatial information may be as follows: the UE adjusts the weight value of the physical and/or logical antenna, such as adjusting the phase of the analog phase shifter and/or adjusting the precoding matrix of the digital precoding to adjust the weight value. , thereby forming an array of weights. The UE may adjust the weights to form a reception weight matrix when receiving the signal. The purpose of the UE to form the receive matrix is to optimize signal reception performance, reduce interference, and the like. The UE may obtain the receiving spatial information of the first signal according to the energy distribution of the first signal in the air domain, thereby selecting the receiving matrix receiving signal that the UE considers to be the most suitable. For example, receiving the first signal according to the energy distribution of the first signal in the air domain. The spatial information may include a correlation matrix obtained from a spatial power spectrum of the signal by a mathematical transformation such as a Fourier transform. The weights adjusted when the signal is transmitted form a transmission weight matrix.
进一步的,当第一信号包含多个信号,UE根据所述第一信号中的多个信号的空间信息确定第二信号的空间信息。具体的,UE可对第一信号中的多个信号进行处理,获得第二信号的空间信息,如UE将第一信号中的每一个信号的空间信息对应的空域或角度域或波束域信息,作为第二信号的空域或角度域或波束域信息;或者,UE将第一信号中的部分信号的空间信息对应的空域或角度域或波束域信息,作为第二信号的空域或角度域或波束域信息。进一步地,UE可以将第一信号中的部分信号的空间信息作为有用信号空间信息,UE可以将第一信号中的部分信号的空间信息作为干扰空间信息,UE获得第二信号的空间信息时可以将第一 信号的部分信号对应的空域或角度域或波束域信息作为有用信号空间信息,部分信号对应的空域或角度域或波束域信息作为干扰空间信息。有用信号也可以称为是信道。Further, when the first signal includes multiple signals, the UE determines spatial information of the second signal according to spatial information of the plurality of signals in the first signal. Specifically, the UE may process the multiple signals in the first signal to obtain spatial information of the second signal, such as the spatial or angular domain or beam domain information corresponding to the spatial information of each signal in the first signal. The spatial or angular domain or beam domain information as the second signal; or the spatial or angular domain or beam domain information corresponding to the spatial information of the partial signal in the first signal by the UE as the spatial or angular domain or beam of the second signal Domain information. Further, the UE may use the spatial information of the partial signal in the first signal as the useful signal spatial information, and the UE may use the spatial information of the partial signal in the first signal as the interference spatial information, and the UE may obtain the spatial information of the second signal. The spatial or angular domain or beam domain information corresponding to the partial signal of the first signal is used as the useful signal spatial information, and the spatial or angular domain or beam domain information corresponding to the partial signal is used as the interference spatial information. A useful signal can also be referred to as a channel.
进一步地,当第二信号包含多个信号时,UE可以对所述第二信号对应的多个信号采用相同或者相近的空间信息。Further, when the second signal includes multiple signals, the UE may use the same or similar spatial information for the multiple signals corresponding to the second signal.
示例的,第一信号包含多个信号,可以指第一信号包含多个CSI-RS资源,或CSI-RS端口;第二信号包含多个信号可以指第一信号包含多个SRS资源,或SRS端口。For example, the first signal includes multiple signals, which may indicate that the first signal includes multiple CSI-RS resources, or a CSI-RS port; the second signal includes multiple signals, which may indicate that the first signal includes multiple SRS resources, or SRS port.
可选的,UE可将第一信号的接收方向,作为第二信号的发送方向的参考。Optionally, the UE may use the receiving direction of the first signal as a reference for the sending direction of the second signal.
示例的,UE可通过调整发送天线权值,使得第二信号的发送权值矩阵与第一信号的接收权值矩阵之间为共轭矩阵关系。可选的,第二信号的发送权值矩阵与第一信号的接收权值矩阵之间为共轭矩阵关系包括:第二信号的发送权值矩阵为第一信号接收权值矩阵的Hermite(埃尔米特)矩阵。For example, the UE may adjust the transmit antenna weight such that the transmit weight matrix of the second signal and the receive weight matrix of the first signal have a conjugate matrix relationship. Optionally, the conjugate matrix relationship between the transmission weight matrix of the second signal and the reception weight matrix of the first signal includes: the transmission weight matrix of the second signal is Hermite of the first signal reception weight matrix. Matrix.
针对S102和S103,举例的,在前述图4所示的DPS场景下,第一无线网络设备(TRP1)和第二无线网络设备(TRP2)均向UE下发数据,TRP1所下发的CSI-RS资源ID与UE收到的第一指示信息所指示的与第二信号(如SRS)具有QCL关系的CSI-RS资源ID相同,因而,UE根据TRP1下发的CSI-RS资源ID确定第二信号的空间信息,比如第二信号的发射波束的方向为指向TRP1的。TRP2所下发的CSI-RS资源ID与UE收到的第一指示信息所指示的与第二信号(如SRS)具有QCL关系的CSI-RS资源ID不同,因而,UE不向TRP2发送第二信号。可以理解的是,在一些场景中,如果UE需要发送的第二信号的空间信息为多个,比如,在JT场景中,UE可以向多个TRP发送数据信号和/或控制信号,那么相应的第一信号的空间信息也可以为多个,比如,可以有多于一个TRP使用相同的与第二信号具有关于空间信息的QCL关系的第一信号的天线端口或资源标识。从而实现确定待发送的第二信号的多个空间信息的目的。For S102 and S103, for example, in the DPS scenario shown in FIG. 4, the first wireless network device (TRP1) and the second wireless network device (TRP2) both send data to the UE, and the CSI-issued by the TRP1. The RS resource ID is the same as the CSI-RS resource ID that has the QCL relationship with the second signal (such as the SRS) indicated by the first indication information received by the UE. Therefore, the UE determines the second according to the CSI-RS resource ID delivered by the TRP1. The spatial information of the signal, such as the direction of the transmit beam of the second signal, is directed to TRP1. The CSI-RS resource ID sent by the TRP2 is different from the CSI-RS resource ID indicated by the first indication information received by the UE and has a QCL relationship with the second signal (such as SRS). Therefore, the UE does not send the second to the TRP2. signal. It can be understood that, in some scenarios, if the spatial information of the second signal that the UE needs to send is multiple, for example, in a JT scenario, the UE may send data signals and/or control signals to multiple TRPs, then corresponding The spatial information of the first signal may also be multiple, for example, there may be more than one TRP using the same antenna port or resource identification of the first signal with the QCL relationship of the spatial information with respect to the second signal. Thereby the purpose of determining a plurality of spatial information of the second signal to be transmitted is achieved.
此外,可以理解的是,通常用于上行信道探测的参考信号,如SRS,的天线端口与上行数据信道(如物理上行共享信号(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH))和/或上行控制信道(如物理上行控制信号(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH))的天线端口一致。In addition, it can be understood that a reference signal, such as an SRS, is generally used for uplink channel sounding, and an antenna port and an uplink data channel (such as a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH)) and/or an uplink control channel (such as The antenna ports of the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) are the same.
UE还可以根据第二信号的空间信息,确定与第二信号相关的信号的空间信息,如上行控制信道,上行数据信号,用于上行解调的参考信号中的至少一个的空间信息。The UE may further determine spatial information of the signal related to the second signal, such as an uplink control channel, an uplink data signal, and spatial information of at least one of the reference signals for uplink demodulation, according to the spatial information of the second signal.
这样,通过用于指示第二信号和第一信号关于空间信息的QCL的第一指示信息,以及UE所接收的第一信号,UE可以确定第二信号的空间信息。Thus, the UE may determine spatial information of the second signal by first indication information indicating the QCL of the second signal and the first signal with respect to the spatial information, and the first signal received by the UE.
可选的,在另一个可能的实施例中,上述S101为可选的。Optionally, in another possible embodiment, the foregoing S101 is optional.
具体的,当第二信号和第一信号关于空间信息的QCL关系中,与第二信号具有QCL关系的第一信号为TRP和UE之间所遵循的固定的,不可配置或动态变化的信号的情况下,S101可以省去。这种QCL关系可以为协议预定义的。Specifically, when the second signal and the QCL relationship of the first signal with respect to the spatial information, the first signal having a QCL relationship with the second signal is a fixed, non-configurable or dynamically changing signal followed between the TRP and the UE. In this case, S101 can be omitted. This QCL relationship can be predefined for the protocol.
这样,通过TRP遵照上述预定义的QCL关系,通过下发第一信号,来指示UE其待发送的第二信号的空间信息。而UE收到上述第一信号,则遵照上述预定义的QCL关系,知悉其待发送的第二信号的空间信息。从而,实现UE确定待发送的第二信号的空间信息的目的。In this way, the TRP is configured to indicate the spatial information of the second signal to be transmitted by the UE by issuing the first signal according to the predefined QCL relationship. When the UE receives the first signal, it learns the spatial information of the second signal to be sent according to the predefined QCL relationship. Thereby, the purpose of the UE determining the spatial information of the second signal to be transmitted is achieved.
如图5c所示的实现方式,包括:The implementation shown in Figure 5c includes:
S201,用户设备接收来自第二无线网络设备的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指 示所述第一信号作为第二信号的空间信息的参考,相应的,第二无线网络设备向所述用户设备发送所述第二指示信息;S201, the user equipment receives second indication information from the second wireless network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the first signal is used as a reference for spatial information of the second signal, and correspondingly, the second wireless network device Transmitting, by the user equipment, the second indication information;
S202,用户设备接收来自第一无线网络设备的第一信号;相应的,第一无线网络设备向所述用户设备发送第一信号;S202. The user equipment receives the first signal from the first wireless network device. Correspondingly, the first wireless network device sends the first signal to the user equipment.
S203,用户设备根据第一信号确定待发送的第二信号的空间信息,并以所述第二信号的空间信息发送所述待发送的第二信号。S203. The user equipment determines spatial information of the second signal to be sent according to the first signal, and sends the second signal to be sent by using spatial information of the second signal.
可选的,第二信号的空间信息包括所述第二信号的发射角,所述第二信号的发射角可以依据所述第一信号的到达角确定。Optionally, the spatial information of the second signal includes an emission angle of the second signal, and an emission angle of the second signal may be determined according to an angle of arrival of the first signal.
进一步的,一种确定空间信息的操作方式可以如下:UE调整物理和/或逻辑天线的加权值,如调整模拟移相器的相位和/或调整数字预编码的预编码矩阵等来调整加权值,从而形成权值阵列。UE在接收信号时可调整权值形成接收权值矩阵。UE形成接收矩阵的目的是最优化信号接收性能,减低干扰等。UE可根据第一信号在空域的能量分布获得第一信号的接收空间信息,从而选择UE认为最合适的接收矩阵接收信号,示例的,根据第一信号在空域的能量分布获得第一信号的接收空间信息可以包括通过数学变换(如傅里叶变换)由信号的空间功率谱获得信号的相关矩阵。发送信号时调整的权值形成发送权值矩阵。Further, an operation manner for determining spatial information may be as follows: the UE adjusts the weight value of the physical and/or logical antenna, such as adjusting the phase of the analog phase shifter and/or adjusting the precoding matrix of the digital precoding to adjust the weight value. , thereby forming an array of weights. The UE may adjust the weights to form a reception weight matrix when receiving the signal. The purpose of the UE to form the receive matrix is to optimize signal reception performance, reduce interference, and the like. The UE may obtain the receiving spatial information of the first signal according to the energy distribution of the first signal in the air domain, thereby selecting the receiving matrix receiving signal that the UE considers to be the most suitable. For example, receiving the first signal according to the energy distribution of the first signal in the air domain. The spatial information may include a correlation matrix obtained from a spatial power spectrum of the signal by a mathematical transformation such as a Fourier transform. The weights adjusted when the signal is transmitted form a transmission weight matrix.
进一步的,当第一信号包含多个信号,UE根据所述第一信号中的多个信号的空间信息确定第二信号的空间信息。具体的,UE可对第一信号中的多个信号进行处理,获得第二信号的空间信息,如UE将第一信号中的每一个信号的空间信息对应的空域或角度域或波束域信息,作为第二信号的空域或角度域或波束域信息;或者,UE将第一信号中的部分信号的空间信息对应的空域或角度域或波束域信息,作为第二信号的空域或角度域或波束域信息。进一步地,UE可以将第一信号中的部分信号的空间信息作为有用信号空间信息,UE可以将第一信号中的部分信号的空间信息作为干扰空间信息,UE获得第二信号的空间信息时可以将第一信号的部分信号对应的空域或角度域或波束域信息作为有用信号空间信息,部分信号对应的空域或角度域或波束域信息作为干扰空间信息。有用信号也可以称为是信道。Further, when the first signal includes multiple signals, the UE determines spatial information of the second signal according to spatial information of the plurality of signals in the first signal. Specifically, the UE may process the multiple signals in the first signal to obtain spatial information of the second signal, such as the spatial or angular domain or beam domain information corresponding to the spatial information of each signal in the first signal. The spatial or angular domain or beam domain information as the second signal; or the spatial or angular domain or beam domain information corresponding to the spatial information of the partial signal in the first signal by the UE as the spatial or angular domain or beam of the second signal Domain information. Further, the UE may use the spatial information of the partial signal in the first signal as the useful signal spatial information, and the UE may use the spatial information of the partial signal in the first signal as the interference spatial information, and the UE may obtain the spatial information of the second signal. The spatial or angular domain or beam domain information corresponding to the partial signal of the first signal is used as the useful signal spatial information, and the spatial or angular domain or beam domain information corresponding to the partial signal is used as the interference spatial information. A useful signal can also be referred to as a channel.
进一步地,当第二信号包含多个信号时,UE可以对所述第二信号对应的多个信号采用相同或者相近的空间信息。Further, when the second signal includes multiple signals, the UE may use the same or similar spatial information for the multiple signals corresponding to the second signal.
示例的,第一信号包含多个信号,可以指第一信号包含多个CSI-RS资源,或CSI-RS端口;第二信号包含多个信号可以指第一信号包含多个SRS资源,或SRS端口。可选的,UE可将第一信号的接收方向,作为第二信号的发送方向的参考。For example, the first signal includes multiple signals, which may indicate that the first signal includes multiple CSI-RS resources, or a CSI-RS port; the second signal includes multiple signals, which may indicate that the first signal includes multiple SRS resources, or SRS port. Optionally, the UE may use the receiving direction of the first signal as a reference for the sending direction of the second signal.
示例的,UE可通过调整发送天线权值,使得第二信号的发送权值矩阵与第一信号的接收权值矩阵之间为共轭矩阵关系。可选的,第二信号的发送权值矩阵与第一信号的接收权值矩阵之间为共轭矩阵关系包括:第二信号的发送权值矩阵为第一信号接收权值矩阵的Hermite(埃尔米特)矩阵。For example, the UE may adjust the transmit antenna weight such that the transmit weight matrix of the second signal and the receive weight matrix of the first signal have a conjugate matrix relationship. Optionally, the conjugate matrix relationship between the transmission weight matrix of the second signal and the reception weight matrix of the first signal includes: the transmission weight matrix of the second signal is Hermite of the first signal reception weight matrix. Matrix.
其中,所述第二无线网络设备与所述第一无线网络设备相同或不同。The second wireless network device is the same as or different from the first wireless network device.
图5c所示的实现方式与图5b所述的实现方式不同在于,图5b中的第一指示信息与QCL假设有关,而图5c中的第二指示信息与QCL假设无直接关系。图5c中通过第二指示信息指示第一信号作为第二信号的空间信息的参考,即通过在下行传输中增加信令,指示UE上行传输的参考资源。该信令(第二指示信息)可以为物理层或高层信令,也可以为高层信令与物理层信令的联合(比如高层信令通知配置情况,物理层信令通知激活)。The implementation shown in Figure 5c differs from the implementation described in Figure 5b in that the first indication information in Figure 5b is related to the QCL hypothesis and the second indication information in Figure 5c is not directly related to the QCL hypothesis. In FIG. 5c, the first indication information is used as a reference for the spatial information of the second signal by using the second indication information, that is, by adding signaling in the downlink transmission, indicating the reference resource of the uplink transmission of the UE. The signaling (second indication information) may be physical layer or higher layer signaling, or may be a combination of high layer signaling and physical layer signaling (such as a high layer signaling notification configuration, physical layer signaling notification activation).
具体的,第一信号可以包括非零功率的参考信号,如用于获得信道状态信息的参考信号(如CSI-RS),用于解调的参考信号(如DMRS)和用于波束管理的参考信号(如BMRS)中的至少一种。第二信号为上行信号,可以为上行参考信号,如用于解调的参考信号或用于上行信道探测的参考信号中的至少一种,也可以为上行数据信号或控制信号。Specifically, the first signal may include a non-zero power reference signal, such as a reference signal (such as CSI-RS) for obtaining channel state information, a reference signal for demodulation (such as DMRS), and a reference for beam management. At least one of a signal (such as BMRS). The second signal is an uplink signal, and may be an uplink reference signal, such as at least one of a reference signal for demodulation or a reference signal for uplink channel sounding, or an uplink data signal or a control signal.
可选的,所述第二指示信息可以包括在所述第一信号的配置信息中。Optionally, the second indication information may be included in configuration information of the first signal.
可选的,所述第一信号的配置信息包括所述第一信号的信道状态信息测量设置(CSI measurement setting)域,所述第一信号的进程(process)域,所述第一信号的资源(resource)域,所述第一信号的天线端口信息域,和所述第一信号所在的波束信息域中的至少一个。其中,所述第一信号所在的波束信息域可以包括第一信号所在的波束标识(ID),可选的,还可以包括波束管理的RS资源,如RS ID和/或RS的天线端口。Optionally, the configuration information of the first signal includes a CSI measurement setting field of the first signal, a process domain of the first signal, and resources of the first signal. a (resource) field, an antenna port information field of the first signal, and at least one of a beam information field in which the first signal is located. The beam information field in which the first signal is located may include a beam identifier (ID) where the first signal is located, and may further include a beam management RS resource, such as an RS ID and/or an antenna port of the RS.
可选的,所述第二指示信息包括若干个比特,所述第一信号对应所述若干个比特中的至少一个比特,所述至少一个比特指示所述第一信号作为所述第二信号的空间信息的参考。这种情况下,所述第二指示信息可以包括在所述第一信号的信道状态信息测量设置域或所述第一信号的进程域中。Optionally, the second indication information includes a number of bits, the first signal corresponds to at least one of the several bits, and the at least one bit indicates the first signal is used as the second signal. Reference to spatial information. In this case, the second indication information may be included in a channel state information measurement setting field of the first signal or a process domain of the first signal.
以第一信号为CSI-RS信号,第二指示信息包括在CSI measurement setting(测量设置)(高层信令)为例,如下所示,该第二指示信息可以表示为参考NZP CSI-RS ID域(referenceCsirsNZPId),该域的定义为一个bit string(比特流)。该比特流中的每个bit可以按协议预定的顺序依次指示一个NZP CSI-RS ID对应的NZP CSI-RS是否作为第二信号的空间信息的参考。可以理解的是,另一种可选的方式为,该域包括若干NZP CSI-RS ID值,每个ID值表示一个作为第二信号的空间信息的参考的资源。由于TRP知悉需要被指示为第二信号的第一信号所属的波束,因而可以控制第一信号和波束之间的关系,使得第二信号的空间信息是可控的。Taking the first signal as a CSI-RS signal, and the second indication information is included in a CSI measurement setting (high-level signaling), as shown below, the second indication information may be represented as a reference NZP CSI-RS ID field. (referenceCsirsNZPId), this field is defined as a bit string. Each bit in the bitstream may sequentially indicate whether the NZP CSI-RS corresponding to one NZP CSI-RS ID is used as a reference for spatial information of the second signal in a predetermined order of the protocol. It can be understood that, in another optional manner, the domain includes a number of NZP CSI-RS ID values, and each ID value represents a resource as a reference for spatial information of the second signal. Since the TRP knows the beam to which the first signal, which is indicated as the second signal, belongs, the relationship between the first signal and the beam can be controlled such that the spatial information of the second signal is controllable.
可选的,所述第二指示信息为一个具有布尔值的域,或者,所述第二指示信息仅在用于指示所述第一信号作为第二信号的空间信息的参考时才存在。这种情况下,所述第二指示信息包括在所述第一信号的资源域,所述第一信号的天线端口信息域,和所述第一信号所在的波束信息域中的至少一个中。Optionally, the second indication information is a domain having a Boolean value, or the second indication information is only present when referring to the spatial information of the first signal as the second signal. In this case, the second indication information is included in a resource domain of the first signal, an antenna port information field of the first signal, and at least one of a beam information field in which the first signal is located.
以第一信号为CSI-RS信号,第二指示信息包括在NZP CSI-RS的资源域(高层信令)为例,如下所示,该第二指示信息可以表示为上行参考激活域(referenceUplinkEnable)。该上行参考激活域的定义为一个布尔值。举例的,为1时可以表示该域所在的NZP CSI-RS的资源作为第二信号的空间信息的参考,为0时可以表示该域所在的NZP CSI-RS的资源不作为第二信号的空间信息的参考。或者,该上行参考激活域的定义可以为一个有需要才配置(存 在)的域,当消息格式中该域存在时,即表示该域所在的NZP CSI-RS的资源作为第二信号的空间信息的参考。而当消息格式中该域不存在时,表示该域所在的NZP CSI-RS的资源不作为第二信号的空间信息的参考,那么即使之前UE将该域所在的NZP CSI-RS的资源作为第二信号的空间信息的参考,也需停止继续将该域所在的NZP CSI-RS的资源作为第二信号的空间信息的参考。可选的,NZP CSI-RS的资源域还可以包括一个有需要才配置的域,当消息格式中该域存在时,即表示该域所在的NZP CSI-RS的资源不作为第二信号的空间信息的参考。这种情况下,当消息格式中表示该域所在的NZP CSI-RS的资源作为第二信号的空间信息的参考的域不存在时,表示该域所在的NZP CSI-RS的资源继续作为第二信号的空间信息的参考,直到消息格式中表示该域所在的NZP CSI-RS的资源不作为第二信号的空间信息的参考的域存在。The first signal is a CSI-RS signal, and the second indication information is included in a resource domain (high-level signaling) of the NZP CSI-RS. As shown below, the second indication information may be represented as an uplink reference activation domain (referenceUplinkEnable). . The upstream reference activation domain is defined as a Boolean value. For example, when 1 is used, the resource of the NZP CSI-RS where the domain is located may be used as a reference for the spatial information of the second signal. When 0, the resource of the NZP CSI-RS where the domain is located may not be used as the space of the second signal. Reference to information. Alternatively, the definition of the uplink reference activation domain may be a domain that needs to be configured (existing). When the domain exists in the message format, the resource of the NZP CSI-RS where the domain is located is used as the spatial information of the second signal. Reference. When the domain does not exist in the message format, the resource indicating that the NZP CSI-RS of the domain is not used as the reference for the spatial information of the second signal, even if the UE previously uses the NZP CSI-RS resource of the domain as the first For reference to the spatial information of the two signals, it is also necessary to stop continuing to use the resources of the NZP CSI-RS in which the domain is located as a reference for the spatial information of the second signal. Optionally, the resource domain of the NZP CSI-RS may also include a domain that needs to be configured. When the domain exists in the message format, the resource of the NZP CSI-RS where the domain is located is not used as the space of the second signal. Reference to information. In this case, when the domain of the message indicating that the NZP CSI-RS resource of the domain is used as the reference for the spatial information of the second signal does not exist, the resource indicating that the NZP CSI-RS of the domain is located continues as the second. The reference to the spatial information of the signal exists until the domain in the message format indicating that the resource of the NZP CSI-RS in which the domain is located is not used as a reference for the spatial information of the second signal.
第二指示信息也可以包括在物理层信令中,比如下行控制信息(DCI)中。当DCI包括所述第一信号的信道状态信息测量设置(CSI measurement setting)域,所述第一信号的进程(process)域,所述第一信号的资源(resource)域,所述第一信号的天线端口信息域,和所述第一信号所在的波束信息域中的至少一个时,第二指示信息也可以包括在DCI中的以上域中的至少一个中。或者,第二指示信息也可以包括在独立的域中,即不包括在以上域中的任意一个中。The second indication information may also be included in physical layer signaling, such as downlink control information (DCI). The DCI includes a channel state information setting setting (CSI measurement setting) field of the first signal, a process field of the first signal, a resource field of the first signal, the first signal The second indication information may also be included in at least one of the above domains in the DCI when the antenna port information field and at least one of the beam information fields in which the first signal is located. Alternatively, the second indication information may also be included in a separate domain, ie, not included in any of the above domains.
以第一信号为波束编号信息(如包括在波束信息域中,或,独立的域中),第二指示信息包括在DCI中为例。DCI中第二指示信令所占的bit数与波束的数量有关。比如,波束编号信息为0-3,则可以通过DCI中的2bit的信息,指示UE哪一个波束的接收方向为UE待发送的上行信号的空间信息的参考。再以第一信号为CSI-RS信号,第二信号的空间信息的参考为第一信号的天线端口或天线端口所在的资源ID(如包括在第一信号的资源域中,或,独立的域中),第二指示信息包括在DCI中为例。DCI中第二指示信息所占的bit数与天线端口的分组或是天线端口所在资源ID的分组有关。比如,天线端口为0-3,0和1为一组,2和3为另一组,则可以通过DCI中的1bit作为第二指示信息,第二指示信息为1时,表示天线端口0和1上的信号作为第二信号的空间信息的参考,为0时,表示天线端口2和3上的信号作为第二信号的空间信息的参考。可以理解的是,第二指示信息具体的指示方式可以依据实 际情况有不同的定义,此处的示例并不作为限制。The first signal is beam number information (as included in the beam information domain, or in an independent domain), and the second indication information is included in the DCI as an example. The number of bits occupied by the second indication signaling in the DCI is related to the number of beams. For example, if the beam number information is 0-3, the 2 bit information in the DCI can be used to indicate which beam direction of the UE is the reference of the spatial information of the uplink signal to be sent by the UE. The first signal is a CSI-RS signal, and the reference of the spatial information of the second signal is a resource ID of the antenna port or the antenna port of the first signal (eg, included in a resource domain of the first signal, or an independent domain) The second indication information is included in the DCI as an example. The number of bits occupied by the second indication information in the DCI is related to the packet of the antenna port or the packet of the resource ID where the antenna port is located. For example, if the antenna port is 0-3, 0 and 1 are a group, and 2 and 3 are another group, 1 bit in the DCI can be used as the second indication information, and when the second indication information is 1, the antenna port 0 and The signal on 1 is used as a reference for the spatial information of the second signal. When 0, the signal on
可选地,第二指示信息也可以被承载在类似第一指示信息的域中。具体地,第二指示信息可以被承载在下行控制信息中的SRS请求域中。Optionally, the second indication information may also be carried in a domain similar to the first indication information. Specifically, the second indication information may be carried in an SRS request field in the downlink control information.
这样,通过第二指示信息的显式的指示,使UE获知作为第二信号的空间信息的参考的第一信号,进而可以确定待发送的第二信号的空间信息。In this way, by the explicit indication of the second indication information, the UE is made aware of the first signal as the reference of the spatial information of the second signal, and thus the spatial information of the second signal to be transmitted can be determined.
本发明实施例还提供一种隐式的指示,如图5d所示的实现方式,包括:The embodiment of the present invention further provides an implicit indication, as shown in Figure 5d, including:
S301,用户设备接收来自第一无线网络设备的第一信号,相应的,第一无线网络设备向用户设备发送第一信号;S301. The user equipment receives a first signal from the first wireless network device, and correspondingly, the first wireless network device sends the first signal to the user equipment.
具体的,所述第一信号属于第二信号的空间信息所参考的信号。Specifically, the first signal belongs to a signal referenced by spatial information of the second signal.
可选的,第一信号具有所述第二信号的空间信息所参考的信号的特征。Optionally, the first signal has a characteristic of a signal referenced by spatial information of the second signal.
S302,用户设备根据所述第一信号确定待发送的第二信号的空间信息并以所述空间信息发送所述待发送的第二信号;S302. The user equipment determines spatial information of the second signal to be sent according to the first signal, and sends the second signal to be sent by using the spatial information.
具体的,用户设备确定所述第一信号属于第二信号的空间信息所参考的信号,所述用户设备根据根据第一信号确定待发送的第二信号的空间信息。Specifically, the user equipment determines that the first signal belongs to a signal referenced by spatial information of the second signal, and the user equipment determines, according to the first signal, spatial information of the second signal to be sent.
进一步地,一种确定空间信息的操作方式可以如下:UE调整物理和/或逻辑天线的加权值,如调整模拟移相器的相位和/或调整数字预编码的预编码矩阵等来调整加权值,从而形成权值阵列。UE在接收信号时可调整权值形成接收权值矩阵。UE形成接收矩阵的目的是最优化信号接收性能,减低干扰等。UE可根据第一信号在空域的能量分布获得第一信号的接收空间信息,从而选择UE认为最合适的接收矩阵接收信号,示例的,根据第一信号在空域的能量分布获得第一信号的接收空间信息可以包括通过数学变换(如傅里叶变换)由信号的空间功率谱获得信号的相关矩阵。发送信号时调整的权值形成发送权值矩阵。Further, an operation mode for determining spatial information may be as follows: the UE adjusts the weight value of the physical and/or logical antenna, such as adjusting the phase of the analog phase shifter and/or adjusting the precoding matrix of the digital precoding to adjust the weight value. , thereby forming an array of weights. The UE may adjust the weights to form a reception weight matrix when receiving the signal. The purpose of the UE to form the receive matrix is to optimize signal reception performance, reduce interference, and the like. The UE may obtain the receiving spatial information of the first signal according to the energy distribution of the first signal in the air domain, thereby selecting the receiving matrix receiving signal that the UE considers to be the most suitable. For example, receiving the first signal according to the energy distribution of the first signal in the air domain. The spatial information may include a correlation matrix obtained from a spatial power spectrum of the signal by a mathematical transformation such as a Fourier transform. The weights adjusted when the signal is transmitted form a transmission weight matrix.
进一步的,当第一信号包含多个信号,UE根据所述第一信号中的多个信号的空间信息确定第二信号的空间信息。具体的,UE可对第一信号中的多个信号进行处理,获得第二信号的空间信息,如UE将第一信号中的每一个信号的空间信息对应的空域或角度域或波束域信息,作为第二信号的空域或角度域或波束域信息;或者,UE将第一信号中的部分信号的空间信息对应的空域或角度域或波束域信息,作为第二信号的空域或角度域或波束域信息。进一步地,UE可以将第一信号中的部分信号的空间信息作为有用信号空间信息,UE可以将第一信号中的部分信号的空间信息作为干扰空间信息,UE获得第二信号的空间信息时可以将第一信号的部分信号对应的空域或角度域或波束域信息作为有用信号空间信息,部分信号对应的空域或角度域或波束域信息作为干扰空间信息。有用信号也可以称为是信道。Further, when the first signal includes multiple signals, the UE determines spatial information of the second signal according to spatial information of the plurality of signals in the first signal. Specifically, the UE may process the multiple signals in the first signal to obtain spatial information of the second signal, such as the spatial or angular domain or beam domain information corresponding to the spatial information of each signal in the first signal. The spatial or angular domain or beam domain information as the second signal; or the spatial or angular domain or beam domain information corresponding to the spatial information of the partial signal in the first signal by the UE as the spatial or angular domain or beam of the second signal Domain information. Further, the UE may use the spatial information of the partial signal in the first signal as the useful signal spatial information, and the UE may use the spatial information of the partial signal in the first signal as the interference spatial information, and the UE may obtain the spatial information of the second signal. The spatial or angular domain or beam domain information corresponding to the partial signal of the first signal is used as the useful signal spatial information, and the spatial or angular domain or beam domain information corresponding to the partial signal is used as the interference spatial information. A useful signal can also be referred to as a channel.
进一步地,当第二信号包含多个信号时,UE可以对所述第二信号对应的多个信号采用相同或者相近的空间信息。Further, when the second signal includes multiple signals, the UE may use the same or similar spatial information for the multiple signals corresponding to the second signal.
示例的,第一信号包含多个信号,可以指第一信号包含多个CSI-RS资源,或CSI-RS端口;第二信号包含多个信号可以指第一信号包含多个SRS资源,或SRS端口。For example, the first signal includes multiple signals, which may indicate that the first signal includes multiple CSI-RS resources, or a CSI-RS port; the second signal includes multiple signals, which may indicate that the first signal includes multiple SRS resources, or SRS port.
可选的,UE可将第一信号的接收方向,作为第二信号的发送方向的参考。Optionally, the UE may use the receiving direction of the first signal as a reference for the sending direction of the second signal.
示例的,UE可通过调整发送天线权值,使得第二信号的发送权值矩阵与第一信号的接收权值矩阵之间为共轭矩阵关系。可选的,第二信号的发送权值矩阵与第一信号的接收权值矩阵之间为共轭矩阵关系包括:第二信号的发送权值矩阵为第一信号接收权值矩阵的Hermite(埃尔米特)矩阵。For example, the UE may adjust the transmit antenna weight such that the transmit weight matrix of the second signal and the receive weight matrix of the first signal have a conjugate matrix relationship. Optionally, the conjugate matrix relationship between the transmission weight matrix of the second signal and the reception weight matrix of the first signal includes: the transmission weight matrix of the second signal is Hermite of the first signal reception weight matrix. Matrix.
可选的,所述用户设备确定所述第一信号属于第二信号的空间信息所参考的信号包括: 所述用户设备确定所述第一信号具有所述第二信号的空间信息所参考的信号的特征。Optionally, the user equipment determines that the signal that the first signal belongs to the spatial information of the second signal includes: the user equipment determines that the first signal has a signal referenced by spatial information of the second signal Characteristics.
可选的,所述第二信号的空间信息所参考的信号的特征包括信号的资源信息,所述资源信息包括天线端口信息,资源标识信息,信道状态信息测量设置标识信息,和进程标识信息中的至少一个,所述信号包括下行控制信号,非零功率参考信号和用于波束管理的信号中的至少一个。Optionally, the feature of the signal referenced by the spatial information of the second signal includes resource information of the signal, where the resource information includes antenna port information, resource identifier information, channel state information measurement setting identifier information, and process identifier information. At least one of the signals includes at least one of a downlink control signal, a non-zero power reference signal, and a signal for beam management.
可选的,第二信号的空间信息包括所述第二信号的发射角,所述第二信号的发射角可以依据所述第一信号的到达角确定。Optionally, the spatial information of the second signal includes an emission angle of the second signal, and an emission angle of the second signal may be determined according to an angle of arrival of the first signal.
这种情况下,用来指示第二信号的空间信息的参考(含参考的集合)是由协议预定义好,并被TRP和用户设备双方所知悉。In this case, the reference (the set containing the reference) used to indicate the spatial information of the second signal is predefined by the protocol and is known by both the TRP and the user equipment.
可选的,用来指示第二信号的空间信息的参考(含参考的集合)不可被配置。Optionally, the reference (the set containing the reference) used to indicate the spatial information of the second signal cannot be configured.
一种可能的方式中,协议规定,UE以用于传输下行控制信息的信道(可以称为下行控制信道,如物理下行控制信道PDCCH)的资源为参考传输上行信号。即第一信号为下行控制信道,下行控制信道的资源包括下行控制信道中的参考信号的天线端口,下行控制信道所在的模拟波束等中的至少一个。In a possible manner, the protocol provides that the UE transmits an uplink signal with reference to resources of a channel for transmitting downlink control information, which may be referred to as a downlink control channel, such as a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH). That is, the first signal is a downlink control channel, and the resources of the downlink control channel include at least one of an antenna port of a reference signal in the downlink control channel, an analog beam where the downlink control channel is located, and the like.
通常发送下行控制信道的是服务小区,而UE需要上行反馈的也是服务小区,所以可以通过定义参照下行控制信道的接收波束作为上行信号(第二信号)的空间信息的参考。Generally, the serving cell is sent by the downlink control channel, and the UE needs the uplink feedback as the serving cell. Therefore, the reference beam of the reference downlink control channel can be used as a reference for the spatial information of the uplink signal (the second signal).
以图4所示的DPS为例,协作场景下,有服务小区和协作小区,协议规定了UE应以下行控制信道的接收方向,确定上行发送的方向。Taking the DPS shown in FIG. 4 as an example, in a cooperative scenario, there are a serving cell and a coordinated cell, and the protocol specifies that the UE should use the following control direction of the control channel to determine the direction of uplink transmission.
在有些场景,如DPS场景中,gNB和TRP可以共存,TRP可以为射频单元(radio unit,RU)。In some scenarios, such as a DPS scenario, gNB and TRP can coexist. The TRP can be a radio unit (RU).
基站在调度时,若要求UE发送上行信号给服务小区,则只在服务小区上发送下行控制信道;若要求UE发送上行信号给服务小区和其他协作小区,则需要接收UE上行信号的基站,都应发送下行控制信道,多个小区发送下行控制信道的方式可以是同时以SFN(单频网,single frequency network)的方式发送,或时分地发送等。When the base station requests the UE to send an uplink signal to the serving cell, the base station only sends the downlink control channel on the serving cell; if the UE is required to send the uplink signal to the serving cell and other coordinated cells, the base station that needs to receive the uplink signal of the UE, The downlink control channel should be sent, and the manner in which the plurality of cells send the downlink control channel can be sent in the form of SFN (single frequency network), or sent in time division.
再一种可能的方式中,举例的,协议规定,UE应以某个(些)下行天线端口作为上行发送的参考。如,以CSI-RS端口为参考,协议规定UE应参考的端口号。In another possible manner, for example, the protocol stipulates that the UE should use a certain downlink antenna port as a reference for uplink transmission. For example, referring to the CSI-RS port, the protocol specifies the port number that the UE should refer to.
通过这样的定义方式,UE可以以接收的天线端口的到达角来确定上行传输的出发角,这样的定义方式可以由TRP在资源调度上进行配合。即只有需要接收UE上行信号的TRP才可以配置前述作为上行传输的出发角参考的天线端口。In this way, the UE can determine the starting angle of the uplink transmission with the angle of arrival of the received antenna port. Such a definition can be coordinated by the TRP on the resource scheduling. That is, only the TRP that needs to receive the uplink signal of the UE can configure the foregoing antenna port as the starting angle reference of the uplink transmission.
举例的,协议规定,UE以下行的天线端口0为上行发送的出发角的参考。For example, the protocol stipulates that the antenna port 0 of the UE is the reference of the departure angle of the uplink transmission.
基站在配置的时候,如多个基站协作,则需要接收UE上行信号的基站,才配置天线端口0,否则应避开天线端口0的配置。When the base station is configured, if multiple base stations cooperate, the base station that needs to receive the uplink signal of the UE needs to configure the antenna port 0. Otherwise, the configuration of the antenna port 0 should be avoided.
如TRP1和TRP2,基站要求UE向TRP1发送上行信号,则TRP1在波束对齐的时候,配置至少包含天线端口0,形成下行波束,在下行发送方向、接收方向扫描完成后,TRP1和UE都保存了包含有天线端口0的波束对的信息。For example, TRP1 and TRP2, the base station requires the UE to send an uplink signal to the TRP1. When the TRP1 is in beam alignment, the configuration includes at least the antenna port 0 to form a downlink beam. After the downlink transmission direction and the reception direction scan are completed, the TRP1 and the UE are saved. Information containing the beam pair of antenna port 0.
而TRP1在发送第一信号时,采用天线端口0发送,而TRP1在发送第一信号时,不采用天线端口0。While TRP1 sends the first signal, it uses antenna port 0 to send, while TRP1 does not use antenna port 0 when transmitting the first signal.
这样,由于只有TRP1采用天线端口发送第一信号,而协议规定了UE以天线端口0为参考,这样限制UE使用只与TRP1所建立的包含天线端口0的波束对的下行到达方向,来确定上行发送的方向。In this way, since only TRP1 uses the antenna port to transmit the first signal, and the protocol specifies that the UE uses antenna port 0 as a reference, this restricts the UE from using the downlink arrival direction of the beam pair including the antenna port 0 established only with TRP1 to determine the uplink. The direction of the send.
可选的,TRP2在波束对齐的时候,所形成的波束里,可以不分配天线端口0,如TRP2配置天线端口1形成下行波束扫描。Optionally, when the beam is aligned, the TRP2 may not allocate the antenna port 0 in the formed beam. For example, the TRP2 configures the
这样,由于只有TRP1与UE建立的下行波束对里有天线端口0,而协议规定了UE以天线端口0为参考,这样可以限制UE使用只与TRP1所建立的包含天线端口0的波束对的下行到达方向,来确定上行发送的方向。In this way, since only the downlink port pair established by the TRP1 and the UE has the antenna port 0, and the protocol specifies that the UE uses the antenna port 0 as a reference, the UE can be restricted to use the downlink of the beam pair including the antenna port 0 established only by the TRP1. The direction of arrival is used to determine the direction of the uplink transmission.
再一种可能的方式中,应用于波束管理,存在波束ID的情况。波束ID对应一组下行的TRP发送和UE接收波束资源。协议规定,UE的上行传输应参考协议所约定的波束ID资源。如,按照波束ID为X的下行波束对资源进行上行发送的参考。In another possible way, it is applied to beam management, where there is a beam ID. The beam ID corresponds to a group of downlink TRP transmissions and UE reception beam resources. The protocol stipulates that the uplink transmission of the UE should refer to the beam ID resource agreed by the protocol. For example, refer to the uplink transmission of the downlink beam according to the beam ID X.
这种方式的优势在于,基站可以在不同的时间资源上配置不同的波束对,对于UE已保存的波束ID,UE可以在随机接入阶段就使用对齐的波束ID X进行上行发送,可以充分利用扫描的结果。The advantage of this mode is that the base station can configure different beam pairs on different time resources. For the beam ID saved by the UE, the UE can use the aligned beam ID X for uplink transmission in the random access phase, which can be fully utilized. The result of the scan.
可选的,基站还可以在进行下行波束对齐的过程中,仅配置用于接收UE的第二信号的TRP在波束扫描阶段使用波束ID为X的资源进行下行波束对齐。这样,可以限制UE使用与用于接收UE的第二信号的TRP所建立的波束对的下行到达方向,来确定上行发送的方向。Optionally, the base station may further configure, in the process of performing downlink beam alignment, only the TRP for receiving the second signal of the UE performs downlink beam alignment in the beam scanning phase by using the resource with the beam ID X. In this way, the UE can be restricted from using the downlink arrival direction of the beam pair established with the TRP for receiving the second signal of the UE to determine the direction of uplink transmission.
举例的,协议规定,UE以波束ID为0为上行发送的参考。For example, the protocol stipulates that the UE uses the beam ID of 0 as a reference for uplink transmission.
基站在配置的时候,如多个基站协作,则需要接收UE上行信号的基站,才配置波束ID为0,否则应避开波束ID为0的配置。When the base station is configured, if multiple base stations cooperate, the base station that needs to receive the uplink signal of the UE needs to configure the beam ID to be 0. Otherwise, the configuration with the beam ID of 0 should be avoided.
这种方式,适用于存在波束ID参数的情况。波束ID可在高层或物理层信令下发。This method is suitable for the case where there is a beam ID parameter. The beam ID can be sent at the upper layer or physical layer signaling.
如TRP1和TRP2,基站要求UE向TRP1发送上行信号,而不向TRP2发送上行信号。For example, TRP1 and TRP2, the base station requires the UE to send an uplink signal to TRP1 without transmitting an uplink signal to TRP2.
则TRP1在波束训练阶段,配置波束ID=0,这个波束对应了至少一个天线端口,通过模拟/数字/混合波束成型,形成一个波束方向。通过下行基站波束发送方向的调整和UE接收方向的调整,对齐形成波束ID=0的波束对。Then, in the beam training phase, TRP1 configures beam ID=0, and this beam corresponds to at least one antenna port, and forms a beam direction through analog/digital/mixed beamforming. The beam pair with beam ID=0 is aligned by adjusting the transmission direction of the downlink base station beam and adjusting the receiving direction of the UE.
而TRP2不以波束ID=0来与UE建立下行波束对关系。TRP2 does not establish a downlink beam pair relationship with the UE with beam ID=0.
这样,UE通过与TRP1建立的波束对,和只以波束ID=0为参考发送上行信号的规定,达到只允许UE向TRP1发送上行信号的目的。In this way, the UE transmits the uplink signal to the TRP1 through the beam pair established with the TRP1 and the uplink signal only with the beam ID=0 as a reference.
再一种可能的方式中,协议规定,UE应以协议规定的CSI-RS资源ID里的CSI-RS天线端口为参考,确定上行传输的空间信息。In another possible manner, the protocol stipulates that the UE should determine the spatial information of the uplink transmission by referring to the CSI-RS antenna port in the CSI-RS resource ID specified by the protocol.
这种方式的优势在于,如果波束扫描的是多个波束,是通过配置在不同的CSI-RS资源中,这样就可以通过CSI-RS资源来区分波束。The advantage of this approach is that if the beam scans multiple beams, it is configured in different CSI-RS resources, so that the CSI-RS resources can be used to distinguish the beams.
举例的,协议规定,UE以NZP CSI-RS resource ID=0为上行发送的空间信息参考。For example, the protocol stipulates that the UE uses the NZP CSI-RS resource ID=0 as the spatial information reference for uplink transmission.
基站在配置的时候,如多个基站协作,则需要接收UE上行信号的基站,才配置NZP CSI-RS ID=0,否则应避开NZP CSI-RS ID=0的配置。When the base station is configured, if multiple base stations cooperate, the base station that needs to receive the uplink signal of the UE needs to configure the NZP CSI-RS ID=0. Otherwise, the configuration of the NZP CSI-RS ID=0 should be avoided.
这种方式,适用于基站用一个NZP CSI-RS资源管理一个波束方向的情况。This method is applicable to the case where the base station manages one beam direction with one NZP CSI-RS resource.
TRP1和TRP2都可以与UE建立下行波束对的对齐关系。其中,如果基站希望UE只向TRP1发送上行信号的话:TRP1为UE配置NZP CSI-RS resource,其ID=0,这个资源对应至少一个天线端口;而TRP2与UE进行波束对齐时,TRP2配置的波束所在的NZP CSI-RS resource其ID与TRP1的不同。Both TRP1 and TRP2 can establish an alignment relationship of the downlink beam pair with the UE. If the base station wants the UE to send the uplink signal only to the TRP1, the TRP1 configures the NZP CSI-RS resource for the UE, the ID of which is 0, and the resource corresponds to at least one antenna port; and when the TRP2 is beam-aligned with the UE, the beam configured by the TRP2 The ID of the NZP CSI-RS resource is different from that of TRP1.
TRP1和TRP2配置的两个NZP CSI-RS resource中的天线端口的端口号、时频资源位置等至少有一个是不一样的,以区分两者。每个NZP CSI-RS中对应的天线端口号、时频资源位置等可以通过高层信令下发。At least one of the port numbers and time-frequency resource locations of the antenna ports in the two NZP CSI-RS resources configured by TRP1 and TRP2 is different to distinguish the two. The corresponding antenna port number, time-frequency resource location, and the like in each NZP CSI-RS can be delivered through high-layer signaling.
这样,UE通过与TRP1建立的波束对,和只以NZP CSI-RS resource ID=0为参考发送上行信号的规定,达到UE只向TRP1发送上行信号的目的。In this way, the UE transmits the uplink signal to the TRP1 by using the beam pair established with the TRP1 and the NDP CSI-RS resource ID=0 as the reference for transmitting the uplink signal.
可以理解的是,这里的上行传输的空间信息的参考还可以指UE的上行模拟波束和/或数字波束成型等的参考,最终可以体现为上行发射角的参考。进行上行传输的信号(第二信号)包括上行控制信号,上行数据信号和参考信号中的至少一种。上行控制信号如物理上行控制信道PUCCH、上行数据信号如物理上行数据信道PUSCH、参考信号如SRS和DMRS等。It can be understood that the reference of the spatial information of the uplink transmission herein may also refer to the reference of the uplink analog beam and/or digital beamforming of the UE, and finally may be embodied as a reference of the uplink transmission angle. The signal (second signal) for performing uplink transmission includes at least one of an uplink control signal, an uplink data signal, and a reference signal. The uplink control signals are, for example, a physical uplink control channel PUCCH, an uplink data signal such as a physical uplink data channel PUSCH, and reference signals such as SRS and DMRS.
可以理解的是,当协议采用了一种预定义的方式,则基站和UE对规定的理解是一致的,UE只可采用该下行资源作为上行发送的方向参考;该下行资源也只可以由用于上行接收的TRP使用。It can be understood that, when the protocol adopts a pre-defined manner, the base station and the UE have the same understanding of the definition, and the UE can only use the downlink resource as the direction reference for the uplink transmission; the downlink resource can only be used by TRP used for uplink reception.
以上所给出的各种协议预定义的方式,可以则其一定义,也可以组合定义。在组合定义的情况下,需要在配置时使得基站和UE对定义的理解是一致的。The predefined manners of the various protocols given above may be either defined or combined. In the case of a combination definition, it is necessary to make the base station and the UE understand the definition consistently at the time of configuration.
通过以上5b,5c和5d中的至少一种方法,可以实现UE确定上行信号的空间信息的目的,也可以简化或省去获得上行波束对的波束扫描和测量过程。The method for determining the spatial information of the uplink signal by the UE may be implemented by using at least one of the foregoing 5b, 5c, and 5d, and the beam scanning and measurement process of obtaining the uplink beam pair may be simplified or omitted.
进一步地,通过5b,5c,和5d中的至少一种方法,UE可获知第一信号与第二信号的空域关系。其中,空域关系包括本申请其他部分提到的空间参数,如发射角(AOA)、主发射角(Dominant AoA)、平均到达角(Average AoA)、到达角(AOD)、信道相关矩阵,到达角的功率角度扩展谱,平均出发角(Average AoD)、出发角的功率角度扩展谱、发射信道相关性、接收信道相关性、发射波束成型、接收波束成型、空间信道相关性、空间滤波器,空间滤波参数,或,空间接收参数等中的一项或多项。由于路径损耗和/或定时提前与空域关系也相关,在UE确定与第二信号具有空域关系的第一信号的前提下,UE可利用第一信号的接收功率测量下行的路径损耗测量,以确定第二信号的上行发送功率,或利用第一信号的接收时间,调整定时提前,以确定第二信号的发送时间。这样UE可以接收第一信号,确定第二信号与第一信号的关系,进而UE可以执行以下中的一项或多项:根据第一信号的接收空间信息来确定第二信号相应的发送空间信息,根据第一信号的接收功率确定第二信号的发送功率,根据第一信号的接收时间确定第二信号的发送时间。Further, the UE can learn the airspace relationship between the first signal and the second signal by using at least one of 5b, 5c, and 5d. Among them, the airspace relationship includes the spatial parameters mentioned in other parts of the application, such as the emission angle (AOA), the main emission angle (Dominant AoA), the average arrival angle (Average AoA), the angle of arrival (AOD), the channel correlation matrix, and the angle of arrival. Power angle spread spectrum, Average AoD, power angle spread spectrum of the departure angle, transmit channel correlation, receive channel correlation, transmit beamforming, receive beamforming, spatial channel correlation, spatial filter, space One or more of filtering parameters, or spatial receiving parameters, and the like. Since the path loss and/or the timing advance are also related to the airspace relationship, the UE may measure the downlink path loss measurement by using the received power of the first signal on the premise that the UE determines the first signal having the spatial relationship with the second signal to determine The uplink transmission power of the second signal, or using the reception time of the first signal, adjusts the timing advance to determine the transmission time of the second signal. The UE may receive the first signal, determine the relationship between the second signal and the first signal, and the UE may perform one or more of the following: determining the corresponding transmission space information of the second signal according to the received spatial information of the first signal. And determining a transmission power of the second signal according to the received power of the first signal, and determining a transmission time of the second signal according to the reception time of the first signal.
具体的,UE根据5b,5c和5d中的至少一种方法,可获得下行信号的接收空间信息,用于确定上行信号的发送空间信息,由此UE获得所述下行信号与所述上行信号之间的对应关系。在原理上,这样的对应关系是为了指示UE向合适的空间方向发送,以便于基站接收。UE发送的不同方向的上行信号,在传播过程中经历不同的路径损耗、传播时延。如图4所示,TRP1、TRP2为两个传输点,这两个传输点可以是在地理上不同位置的传输点。由于UE到两个传输点的距离不等,UE发送的上行信号经历的路径损耗、传播时延也不同。在5b、5c、5d中的至少一种方法,UE根据第一信号确定第二信号的空间信息,其原理是第一信号在空间传播的路径与第二信号的路径是高相关的。因此,第一信号在传播过程中经历的路径损耗、传播时延也可认为与第二信号在传播过程中经历的路径损耗、传播时延是高相关的。因此,所述第一信号与第二信号的对应关系也可以用于UE确定第二信号的路径损耗、传播时延。Specifically, the UE obtains the receiving space information of the downlink signal according to at least one of the methods 5b, 5c, and 5d, and is used to determine the sending spatial information of the uplink signal, so that the UE obtains the downlink signal and the uplink signal. Correspondence between the two. In principle, such a correspondence is to indicate that the UE is transmitting in the appropriate spatial direction in order to facilitate reception by the base station. Uplink signals in different directions sent by the UE experience different path loss and propagation delay in the propagation process. As shown in FIG. 4, TRP1 and TRP2 are two transmission points, which may be transmission points at geographically different locations. Since the distance between the UE and the two transmission points is not equal, the path loss and propagation delay experienced by the uplink signal sent by the UE are also different. In at least one of 5b, 5c, 5d, the UE determines spatial information of the second signal according to the first signal, the principle is that the path of the first signal in spatial propagation is highly correlated with the path of the second signal. Therefore, the path loss and propagation delay experienced by the first signal during propagation can also be considered to be highly correlated with the path loss and propagation delay experienced by the second signal during propagation. Therefore, the correspondence between the first signal and the second signal may also be used by the UE to determine a path loss and a propagation delay of the second signal.
可选的,所述第一信号包括非零功率的参考信号。Optionally, the first signal includes a non-zero power reference signal.
可选的,所述第一信号所包括的非零功率的参考信号为非零功率的用于获得信道状态信息的参考信号,非零功率的用于解调的参考信号,非零功率的用于波束管理的参考信号,同步信号,和,用于时间、频率同步跟踪的跟踪参考信号Tracking RS中的至少一种。举例的,在LTE系统中,用于获得信道状态信息的参考信号可以为信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information-reference signal,CSI-RS),用于解调的参考信号可以为解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)。在NR系统,用于获得信道状态信息的参考信号可以为CSI-RS,也可以为其他具有获得信道状态信息功能的参考信号,用于解调的参考信号可以为DMRS,也可以为其他具有用于解调功能的参考信号,而用于波束管理的参考信号可以为波束管理参考信号(beam management reference signal,BMRS),用于波束管理的参考信号可以用于波束的大尺度特性的测量,进而用于波束的扫描,对齐和修正,比如通过测量大尺度特性中的增益,将增益最大的波束对作为一对波束对。Optionally, the non-zero power reference signal included in the first signal is a non-zero power reference signal for obtaining channel state information, a non-zero power reference signal for demodulation, and a non-zero power At least one of a beam-managed reference signal, a synchronization signal, and a tracking reference signal Tracking RS for time and frequency synchronization tracking. For example, in the LTE system, the reference signal used to obtain channel state information may be a channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS), and the reference signal used for demodulation may be a demodulation reference signal. (demodulation reference signal, DMRS). In the NR system, the reference signal used to obtain channel state information may be a CSI-RS, or may be another reference signal having a function of obtaining channel state information, and the reference signal used for demodulation may be a DMRS, or may be used for other purposes. For the reference signal of the demodulation function, the reference signal for beam management may be a beam management reference signal (BMRS), and the reference signal for beam management may be used for measurement of large-scale characteristics of the beam, and further Used for beam scanning, alignment and correction, such as by measuring the gain in large-scale characteristics, using the beam pair with the largest gain as a pair of beam pairs.
可选的,所述第二信号包括参考信号。该参考信号可以为非零功率的参考信号,也可以为零功率的参考信号。Optionally, the second signal includes a reference signal. The reference signal can be a non-zero power reference signal or a zero power reference signal.
可选的,所述第二信号所包括的参考信号为用于解调的参考信号和用于上行信道测量的参考信号中的至少一种。举例的,在LTE系统中,用于解调的参考信号可以为DMRS,用于上行信道测量的参考信号可以为探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)。在NR系统中,用于解调的参考信号可以为DMRS,也可以为其他具有用于解调功能的参考信号;用于上行信道测量的参考信号可以为SRS,也可以其他具有上行信道测量功能的参考信号。Optionally, the reference signal included in the second signal is at least one of a reference signal used for demodulation and a reference signal used for uplink channel measurement. For example, in the LTE system, the reference signal used for demodulation may be a DMRS, and the reference signal used for uplink channel measurement may be a sounding reference signal (SRS). In the NR system, the reference signal used for demodulation may be a DMRS, or may be other reference signals for demodulation functions; the reference signal used for uplink channel measurement may be SRS, or other uplink channel measurement functions may be used. Reference signal.
在本申请的一种可能的实施方式中,UE可根据所述第一信号的接收功率,确定上行信号(包括第二信号和/或第二信号相关的信号)的发送功率,用此发送功率来发送上行信号。In a possible implementation manner of the present application, the UE may determine, according to the received power of the first signal, a transmit power of an uplink signal (including a second signal and/or a second signal related signal), and use the transmit power. To send an upstream signal.
其中,第二信号相关的信号可以包括该信号的天线端口(也可简称为端口,port)与第二信号的天线端口的交集为非空的信号,该信号可以为上行数据信号,和/或,上行控制信号,和/或,与第二信号不同的参考信号。The second signal related signal may include a signal that the intersection of the antenna port (also referred to as a port, port) of the signal and the antenna port of the second signal is non-empty, and the signal may be an uplink data signal, and/or , an uplink control signal, and/or a reference signal different from the second signal.
可选的,第二信号相关的信号可以通过显式指示的方式来指示与第二信号的关系。如基站向UE发送信令,指示某信号为与第二信号相关的信号。Optionally, the second signal related signal may indicate the relationship with the second signal by means of an explicit indication. If the base station sends signaling to the UE, indicating that the signal is a signal related to the second signal.
具体的,本申请提供一种通信方法,可以包括:Specifically, the application provides a communication method, which may include:
S801,基站向UE发送用于指示第一信号的发送功率的信息;S801. The base station sends, to the UE, information for indicating a transmit power of the first signal.
相应的,UE接收用于指示第一信号的发送功率的信息;Correspondingly, the UE receives information indicating a transmit power of the first signal;
可选的,所述通知方式可以为基站通过RRC中的信元给UE发送信令,该信令指示第一信号的发送功率;Optionally, the notification manner may be that the base station sends signaling to the UE by using a cell in the RRC, where the signaling indicates a sending power of the first signal;
可选的,该发送功率为基站侧的发送功率。Optionally, the transmit power is a transmit power of the base station side.
S802,UE接收第一信号,测量并得到第一信号的接收功率;S802. The UE receives the first signal, and measures and obtains the received power of the first signal.
可选的,UE可将第一信号的接收功率在一定的时间窗内进行滤波平滑,得到滤波后的接收功率作为所述第一信号的接收功率。Optionally, the UE may perform filtering and smoothing the received power of the first signal within a certain time window to obtain the filtered received power as the received power of the first signal.
当第一信号为用于获得信道状态信息的参考信号CSI-RS时,该接收功率也可称成CSI-RS参考信号接收功率(RSRP,reference signal received power);When the first signal is a reference signal CSI-RS for obtaining channel state information, the received power may also be referred to as a CSI-RS reference signal received power (RSRP);
S803,UE根据所述基站通知第一信号的发送功率,和第一信号的接收功率,得到第一信号的路径损耗;S803. The UE obtains a path loss of the first signal according to the base station notifying the transmit power of the first signal and the received power of the first signal.
可选的,所述第一信号的接收功率可以为参考信号接收功率。Optionally, the received power of the first signal may be a reference signal received power.
可选的,路径损耗等于用发送功率减去经过滤波的参考信号接收功率的获得的差值;Optionally, the path loss is equal to a difference obtained by subtracting the received power of the filtered reference signal from the transmit power;
S804,UE根据该路径损耗或该路径损耗相关的开环控制参数确定上行发送功率,并使用该上行发送功率发送上行信号。其中,使用该上行发送功率发送上行信号可以为可选的。S804. The UE determines an uplink transmit power according to the path loss or an open loop control parameter related to the path loss, and sends an uplink signal by using the uplink transmit power. Wherein, sending the uplink signal by using the uplink transmit power may be optional.
其中上行信号包括所述第二信号和/或第二信号相关的信号。可选的,UE获得第一信号与第二信号和/或第二信号相关的信号的对应关系。所述对应关系可通过实施例的步骤5c、5d、 5b中的至少一种获得。Wherein the uplink signal comprises a signal related to the second signal and/or the second signal. Optionally, the UE obtains a correspondence between the first signal and the signal related to the second signal and/or the second signal. The correspondence may be obtained by at least one of steps 5c, 5d, 5b of the embodiment.
第二信号相关的信号可以包括该信号的天线端口(也可简称为端口,port)与第二信号的天线端口的交集为非空的信号,该信号可以为上行数据信号,和/或,上行控制信号,和/或,与第二信号不同的参考信号。比如,第二信号为SRS,该SRS只有1个port,如,port 12,而PUSCH具有4个port,如port 9-12,由于SRS的这1个port是PUSCH的4个port里的一个,因而PUSCH可以认为是该第二信号相关的信号。再比如,第二信号为SRS,该SRS有2个port,如,port 10和12,而PUSCH具有4个port,如port 7,9,11和12,由于SRS和PUSCH天线端口具有交集,port 12,因而该PUSCH可以认为是该第二信号相关的信号。The signal related to the second signal may include a signal that the intersection of the antenna port (also referred to as a port, port) of the signal and the antenna port of the second signal is non-empty, and the signal may be an uplink data signal, and/or uplink A control signal, and/or a reference signal that is different from the second signal. For example, the second signal is SRS, the SRS has only one port, such as port 12, and the PUSCH has 4 ports, such as port 9-12. Since the 1 port of the SRS is one of the 4 ports of the PUSCH, Thus the PUSCH can be considered to be the signal associated with the second signal. For another example, the second signal is SRS, the SRS has 2 ports, such as ports 10 and 12, and the PUSCH has 4 ports, such as ports 7, 9, 11 and 12, since the SRS and PUSCH antenna ports have intersections, ports 12, and thus the PUSCH can be considered as the second signal related signal.
第二信号相关的信号与第二信号通常是采用相同或相近的空间信息进行发送的信号。The second signal related signal and the second signal are typically signals transmitted using the same or similar spatial information.
可选的,第二信号相关的信号可以通过显式指示的方式来指示与第二信号的关系。如基站向UE发送信令,指示某信号为与第二信号相关的信号。Optionally, the second signal related signal may indicate the relationship with the second signal by means of an explicit indication. If the base station sends signaling to the UE, indicating that the signal is a signal related to the second signal.
通常的,UE可以根据开环控制参数、闭环控制参数、基站期望的标称功率密度、信号带宽、最大功率的限制中的一项或多项,得到上行发送功率。其中,开环控制参数可以包括前述路径损耗。Generally, the UE may obtain uplink transmit power according to one or more of an open loop control parameter, a closed loop control parameter, a base station desired nominal power density, a signal bandwidth, and a maximum power limit. Wherein, the open loop control parameter may include the foregoing path loss.
这样,相当于UE将所述路径损耗补偿到发送功率中,可以使得上行信号(如第二信号)在传播过程中经历了路径损耗后到达基站时的信号质量能满足基站的解调要求。In this way, the UE compensates the path loss to the transmit power, so that the uplink signal (such as the second signal) can satisfy the demodulation requirement of the base station when the path loss occurs after the path loss occurs in the propagation process.
可选的,所述路径损耗补偿可体现为路径损耗与一系数(也可称为补偿系数,路径损耗补偿系数,因子,补偿因子,或,路径损耗补偿因子)的乘积。所述系数可以是非负数,由基站配给UE,所述配置可以是小区级(cell-specific)的或UE级(UE-specific)的。当该系数配置为1时,UE将由第一信号测得的路径损耗全部补偿到第二信号的发送功率上;当该系数配置为0时,UE不补偿路径损耗;当该系数配置小于1时,UE将由第一信号测得的路径损耗部分补偿到第二信号的发送功率上,此时基站配置小于1的补偿系数,可以使得第二信号的接收的同时,减小对其他用户的干扰;当该系数配置为大于1时,UE将由第一信号测得的路径损耗超量补偿到第二信号的发送功率上。基站配置大于1的补偿系数,可以补偿基站侧波束成型与UE侧波束成型的不对称性。具体地,基站发送、接收的波束成型信号在方向图上能量更集中,主瓣更窄,而UE由于天线配置比基站规模小,接收、发送的波束成型信号在方向图上能量更分散,主瓣更宽,这导致了下行的信号在空间的能量分布集中,UE能够以宽波束接收窄波束,能够更好地获得下行信号,而上行基站以窄波束接收UE发送的宽波束,会有部分能量损耗,因此,基站为UE配置大于1的补偿系数,可以使得UE补偿由于上述原因造成的损耗。Optionally, the path loss compensation may be embodied as a product of a path loss and a coefficient (also referred to as a compensation coefficient, a path loss compensation coefficient, a factor, a compensation factor, or a path loss compensation factor). The coefficients may be non-negative, assigned to the UE by the base station, and the configuration may be cell-specific or UE-specific. When the coefficient is configured to be 1, the UE compensates the path loss measured by the first signal to the transmit power of the second signal; when the coefficient is configured to be 0, the UE does not compensate for the path loss; when the coefficient configuration is less than 1 The UE compensates the path loss measured by the first signal to the transmission power of the second signal. At this time, the base station configures a compensation coefficient smaller than 1, so that the reception of the second signal can reduce the interference to other users. When the coefficient is configured to be greater than 1, the UE compensates for the path loss measured by the first signal to the transmit power of the second signal. The base station is configured with a compensation coefficient greater than 1, which can compensate for the asymmetry of the base station side beamforming and the UE side beamforming. Specifically, the beamforming signals transmitted and received by the base station are more concentrated in the pattern, and the main lobe is narrower, and the UE has a smaller antenna configuration than the base station, and the received and transmitted beamforming signals are more dispersed in the direction map. The wider the valve, which results in the concentration of the downlink signal in the spatial energy distribution, the UE can receive the narrow beam with a wide beam, and can obtain the downlink signal better, and the uplink base station receives the wide beam transmitted by the UE with the narrow beam, and there will be a part. The energy loss, therefore, the base station configures the UE with a compensation coefficient greater than 1, which can cause the UE to compensate for the loss due to the above reasons.
综上,UE可测量第一信号的接收功率,获得第一信号的路径损耗(pass loss,PL),将第一信号的路径损耗作为第二信号的路径损耗补偿。UE对第二信号的发送功率进行alpha*PL的补偿,其中alpha是路径损耗补偿因子。UE在进行路径损耗补偿后,以满足最大发射功率限制的发送功率将第二信号发送给基站。该路径损耗补充因子可以为协议规定的,或,本地预配置或预存储的,或者,可以为基站配置的。In summary, the UE can measure the received power of the first signal, obtain the path loss (PL) of the first signal, and compensate the path loss of the first signal as the path loss of the second signal. The UE compensates for the transmission power of the second signal by alpha*PL, where alpha is the path loss compensation factor. After performing path loss compensation, the UE sends the second signal to the base station to meet the maximum transmit power limit. The path loss supplement factor may be specified by the protocol, or locally pre-configured or pre-stored, or may be configured for the base station.
在本申请可能的另一种实施方式中,UE可根据所述第一信号的接收时间,确定和/或调整上行信号的发送时间。In another possible implementation manner of the present application, the UE may determine and/or adjust a transmission time of the uplink signal according to the receiving time of the first signal.
其中,上行信号包括所述第二信号和/或第二信号相关的信号。The uplink signal includes the second signal and/or the second signal related signal.
第一信号,第二信号,第二信号相关的信号,及上行信号的描述可以参考前述方法中的描述。The description of the first signal, the second signal, the second signal related signal, and the uplink signal can be referred to the description in the foregoing method.
具体的,本申请提供一种通信方法,可以包括:Specifically, the application provides a communication method, which may include:
S901,基站向UE发送至少两个第一信号;S901. The base station sends at least two first signals to the UE.
相应的,UE接收来自基站的第一信号;Correspondingly, the UE receives the first signal from the base station;
可选的,所述至少两个第一信号具有相同的配置信息,该配置信息可以用于指示下行信号所使用的天线端口、时频资源位置、所在的资源标识中的至少一项。Optionally, the at least two first signals have the same configuration information, and the configuration information may be used to indicate at least one of an antenna port, a time-frequency resource location, and a resource identifier used by the downlink signal.
S902,UE根据所述至少两个第一信号确定第一信号的传播时延的变化值;S902. The UE determines, according to the at least two first signals, a change value of a propagation delay of the first signal.
可选的,第一信号的传播时延的变化值可以为该至少两个第一信号的接收时间的函数,比如为至少两个第一信号中两个第一信号的接收时间的差值,或多个差值的平均值。Optionally, the change value of the propagation delay of the first signal may be a function of the reception time of the at least two first signals, such as a difference between the reception times of the two first signals in the at least two first signals, Or the average of multiple differences.
本申请中,接收时间是指UE确定的所收到的信号的时间,其可能与该信号实际到达的时间有一定偏差,比如为经过了量化的时间,该接收时间也可以称为接收定时。In the present application, the receiving time refers to the time of the received signal determined by the UE, which may be deviated from the time when the signal actually arrives, for example, the time that has been quantized, and the receiving time may also be referred to as the receiving timing.
S903,UE根据所述第一信号的传播时延的变化值,确定和/或调整上行信号的发送时间;S903. The UE determines and/or adjusts a sending time of the uplink signal according to a change value of a propagation delay of the first signal.
可选的,UE可以根据第一信号的传播时延的变化值(也称为变化,偏移(offset)),调整上行发送的定时提前量(TA)。由于上行信号的发送时间与该定时提前量有关,UE相当于调整了上行信号的发送时间。Optionally, the UE may adjust the timing advance (TA) of the uplink transmission according to a change value (also referred to as a change, an offset) of the propagation delay of the first signal. Since the transmission time of the uplink signal is related to the timing advance amount, the UE is equivalent to adjusting the transmission time of the uplink signal.
可选的,调整后的TA=调整前的TA+offset。其中,offset可以为正值,也可以为负值。Optionally, the adjusted TA=TA+offset before adjustment. Among them, offset can be positive or negative.
S904,UE基于所述上行信号的发送时间,发送所述上行信号。S904. The UE sends the uplink signal according to a sending time of the uplink signal.
一般地,上行信号的发送时间可由基站来确定:基站通过UE发送的信号,如,前导信号preamble、上行信道探测信号SRS、上行用于解调的专用信号DMRS等,可以确定UE发送的信号在传播过程中经历的传播时延;基站通过测量信号的传播时延可确定UE发送上行信号的时间调整,所述时间调整可通过上行定时提前来表示,基站通过定时提前指示以期使得UE发送的信号在传播过程中经历了传播时延后,能够在基站期待的时间到达基站,以减少对小区中其他UE的干扰。具体地,基站可通过调整UE发送上行信号的时间,使得UE之间时频域、空域是正交的。对于时频域正交的多个UE,若UE发送的信号到达基站的时间,与所述的多个UE中的其他UE重叠,会导致在同一时间本应该正交的UE发生了重叠,从而产生干扰。因此,UE发送的上行信号要符合基站期待的到达时延需求。Generally, the sending time of the uplink signal may be determined by the base station: the signal transmitted by the UE through the UE, such as the preamble preamble, the uplink channel sounding signal SRS, the uplink dedicated signal DMRS, etc., may determine that the signal sent by the UE is The propagation delay experienced in the propagation process; the base station can determine the time adjustment of the uplink signal sent by the UE by measuring the propagation delay of the signal, and the time adjustment can be represented by the uplink timing advance, and the base station uses the timing advance indication to make the signal sent by the UE. After the propagation delay is experienced in the propagation process, the base station can be reached at the time expected by the base station to reduce interference to other UEs in the cell. Specifically, the base station can adjust the time when the UE sends the uplink signal, so that the time-frequency domain and the airspace between the UEs are orthogonal. For multiple UEs that are orthogonal in the time-frequency domain, if the time that the signal sent by the UE arrives at the base station overlaps with other UEs in the multiple UEs, the UEs that should be orthogonal at the same time overlap. Interference. Therefore, the uplink signal sent by the UE is consistent with the expected arrival delay requirement of the base station.
在基站通过媒体接入控制(MAC)层信元通知UE所述定时提前量的情况下,两次MAC层信元的发送之间需要一定的时间,在未收到基站下发的定时提前量的通知时,UE可根据下行信号(第一信号)的接收时间,来自行调整并更新定时提前量。具体的,UE可测量两个第一信号的接收定时时间差,得到下行信号接收定时的差值,推导出下行信号经历的传播时延的变化,用该传播时延的变化来调整上行发送的定时提前量。In the case that the base station notifies the UE of the timing advance by the medium access control (MAC) layer cell, a certain time is required between the transmission of the two MAC layer cells, and the timing advance delivered by the base station is not received. When the notification is received, the UE may adjust and update the timing advance amount according to the reception time of the downlink signal (the first signal). Specifically, the UE may measure the time difference of the receiving timing of the two first signals, obtain the difference of the downlink signal receiving timing, derive the change of the propagation delay experienced by the downlink signal, and adjust the timing of the uplink sending by using the change of the propagation delay. Advance quantity.
其中,S904中,UE可以根据所述上行信号的发送时间,发送该发送时间对应的时域单元的第二信号,所述时域单元可以是子帧,时隙(slot),符号(如OFDM符号)或迷你时隙(minislot)中的一个或多个。In S904, the UE may send the second signal of the time domain unit corresponding to the sending time according to the sending time of the uplink signal, where the time domain unit may be a subframe, a slot, and a symbol (such as OFDM). Symbol) or one or more of minislots.
可选的,UE在调整了上行发送定时提前量后,可以更新所维护或存储的上行发送定时提前量。Optionally, after adjusting the uplink transmission timing advance amount, the UE may update the uplink transmission timing advance amount that is maintained or stored.
进一步,可选的,UE可上报上行发送定时提前量,如调整后的上行发送定时提前量。或者,UE可上报与上行发送定时提前量相关的信息,所述信息是上行发送定时提前量对应的函数的值。当UE要维护多个上行定时提前量的时候,UE可上报多个上行定时提前量,或者是多个与上行发送定时提前量相关的信息,或者是与多个上行发送定时提前量相关的信息。具体地,UE可上报多个上行定时提前量中的至少两个的差值,或差值的函数。所述差值的函数 可以是指时域的差值对应的频域的相位偏移,这两者之间可以是具有FFT/IFFT关系的函数。UE可向第一网络设备、第二网络设备其中的至少一个网络设备,上报对应第一网络设备、第二网络设备其中的至少一个网络设备的上行信号的上行发送定时提前量,或与上行发送定时提前量相关的信息。UE上报的上行发送定时提前量,或与上行发送定时提前量相关的信息与第一网络设备对应的第一信号,和/或,第二网络设备对应的第一信号有对应关系。Further, optionally, the UE may report an uplink transmission timing advance amount, such as an adjusted uplink transmission timing advance amount. Alternatively, the UE may report information related to an uplink transmission timing advance amount, where the information is a value corresponding to a function of an uplink transmission timing advance amount. When the UE is to maintain multiple uplink timing advances, the UE may report multiple uplink timing advances, or multiple information related to the uplink transmit timing advance, or information related to multiple uplink transmit timing advances. . Specifically, the UE may report a difference, or a function of a difference, of at least two of the plurality of uplink timing advances. The function of the difference may refer to a phase offset of the frequency domain corresponding to the difference of the time domain, which may be a function having an FFT/IFFT relationship. The UE may report, to the at least one of the first network device and the second network device, an uplink transmission timing advance amount of the uplink signal corresponding to the at least one of the first network device and the second network device, or send the uplink uplink timing Timing advance related information. The uplink transmission timing advance amount reported by the UE, or the information related to the uplink transmission timing advance amount has a corresponding relationship with the first signal corresponding to the first network device, and/or the first signal corresponding to the second network device.
举例而言,在第一时域单元slot1,第二时域单元slot2,UE接收slot1和slot2的第一信号。其中,slot1为第一时域单元的一个示例,slot2为第二时域单元的一个示例。在接收下行信号时,UE可以根据物理信号,比如导频,的位置进行同步定时,得知slot1的第一信号的到达定时t1,和slot2的到达定时t2,。UE根据t1和t2之间的时间差,可以得到下行信号传播时延的变化。举例如,时域单元slot长度可以为t0,如t0=0.5ms。从slot1到slot2经历的N个slot长度,N为两个slot1和slot2之间的时域单元单元个数。那么UE根据t2-t1-N*t0的计算结果,可以获得从slot1到slot2,第一信号的下行传播时延变化了多少。通常基站会发送Timing Advance Command(定时提前指令),告知UE发送上行信号需要提前的时间,UE应记录维护相应的定时提前量TA。在UE尚未接收到Timing Advance Command的时候,UE可根据上述第一信号传播时延的变化,调整当前所维护的TA。调整后的TA为调整前的TA加上第一信号传播时延的变化值。UE调整TA,并根据调整的TA,发送第二信号。For example, in the first time domain unit slot1, the second time domain unit slot2, the UE receives the first signals of slot1 and slot2. Where
根据前述方法,如图6所示,本发明实施例还提供一种用于信号传输的装置,该装置可以为无线设备10。该无线设备10可以对应上述方法中的第一无线网络设备或第二无线网络设备。第一无线网络设备可以为基站(如TRP),也可以为其他设备,在此不予限定。第二无线网络设备可以为基站(如TRP),也可以为其他设备,在此不予限定。According to the foregoing method, as shown in FIG. 6, an embodiment of the present invention further provides an apparatus for signal transmission, which may be a wireless device 10. The wireless device 10 can correspond to the first wireless network device or the second wireless network device in the above method. The first wireless network device may be a base station (such as a TRP) or other devices, which is not limited herein. The second wireless network device may be a base station (such as a TRP) or other devices, which is not limited herein.
该装置可以包括处理器110、存储器120、总线系统130、接收器140和发送器150。其中,处理器110、存储器120、接收器140和发送器150通过总线系统130相连,该存储器120用于存储指令,该处理器110用于执行该存储器120存储的指令,以控制接收器140接收信号,并控制发送器150发送信号,完成上述方法中第一无线网络设备(如基站)或第二无线网络设备的步骤。其中,接收器140和发送器150可以为相同或者不同的物理实体。为相同的物理实体时,可以统称为收发器。所述存储器220可以集成在所述处理器210中,也可以与所述处理器210分开设置。The apparatus can include a
作为一种实现方式,接收器140和发送器150的功能可以考虑通过收发电路或者收发的专用芯片实现。处理器110可以考虑通过专用处理芯片、处理电路、处理器或者通用芯片实现。As an implementation, the functions of the
作为另一种实现方式,可以考虑使用通用计算机的方式来实现本发明实施例提供的无线设备。即将实现处理器110,接收器140和发送器150功能的程序代码存储在存储器中,通用处理器通过执行存储器中的代码来实现处理器110,接收器140和发送器150的功能。As another implementation manner, a wireless device provided by an embodiment of the present invention may be implemented by using a general-purpose computer. The program code that is to implement the functions of the
该装置所涉及的与本发明实施例提供的技术方案相关的概念,解释和详细说明及其他步骤请参见前述方法或其他实施例中关于这些内容的描述,此处不做赘述。For the concepts, explanations, detailed descriptions and other steps related to the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present invention, refer to the descriptions of the foregoing methods or other embodiments, and no further details are provided herein.
根据前述方法,如图7所示,本发明实施例还提供另一种用于信号传输的装置,该装置可以为无线设备20,该无线设备20对应上述方法中的用户设备。According to the foregoing method, as shown in FIG. 7, the embodiment of the present invention further provides another apparatus for signal transmission, and the apparatus may be a wireless device 20, and the wireless device 20 corresponds to the user equipment in the foregoing method.
该装置可以包括处理器210、存储器220、总线系统230、接收器240和发送器250。其中,处理器210、存储器220、接收器240和发送器250通过总线系统230相连,该存储器220用于存储指令,该处理器210用于执行该存储器220存储的指令,以控制接收器240接收信号, 并控制发送器250发送信号,完成上述方法中用户设备的步骤。其中,接收器240和发送器250可以为相同或者不同的物理实体。为相同的物理实体时,可以统称为收发器。所述存储器220可以集成在所述处理器210中,也可以与所述处理器210分开设置。The apparatus can include a
作为一种实现方式,接收器240和发送器250的功能可以考虑通过收发电路或者收发的专用芯片实现。处理器210可以考虑通过专用处理芯片、处理电路、处理器或者通用芯片实现。As an implementation, the functions of the
作为另一种实现方式,可以考虑使用通用计算机的方式来实现本发明实施例提供的无线设备。即将实现处理器210,接收器240和发送器250功能的程序代码存储在存储器中,通用处理器通过执行存储器中的代码来实现处理器210,接收器240和发送器250的功能。As another implementation manner, a wireless device provided by an embodiment of the present invention may be implemented by using a general-purpose computer. The program code that is to implement the functions of the
所述装置所涉及的与本发明实施例提供的技术方案相关的概念,解释和详细说明及其他步骤请参见前述方法或其他实施例中关于这些内容的描述,此处不做赘述。For the concepts, explanations, detailed descriptions and other steps related to the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present invention, refer to the descriptions of the foregoing methods or other embodiments, which are not described herein.
根据本发明实施例提供的方法,本发明实施例还提供一种通信系统,其包括前述的第一无线网络设备和第二无线网络设备,还可以进一步包括一个或多于一个前述的用户设备。According to the method provided by the embodiment of the present invention, the embodiment of the present invention further provides a communication system, including the foregoing first wireless network device and second wireless network device, and may further include one or more than one of the foregoing user devices.
应理解,在本发明实施例中,处理器110或210可以是中央处理单元(Central Processing Unit,简称为“CPU”),该处理器还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。It should be understood that, in the embodiment of the present invention, the
该存储器120或220可以包括只读存储器和随机存取存储器,并向处理器310提供指令和数据。存储器的一部分还可以包括非易失性随机存取存储器。例如,存储器还可以存储设备类型的信息。The
该总线系统130或230除包括数据总线之外,还可以包括电源总线、控制总线和状态信号总线等。但是为了清楚说明起见,在图中将各种总线都标为总线系统。The
在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器110或210中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本发明实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。为避免重复,这里不再详细描述。In the implementation process, each step of the above method may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the
还应理解,本文中涉及的第一、第二、第三、第四以及各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本发明实施例的范围。It is also to be understood that the first, second, third, fourth,
应理解,本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。It should be understood that the term "and/or" herein is merely an association relationship describing an associated object, indicating that there may be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which may indicate that A exists separately, and A and B exist simultaneously. There are three cases of B alone. In addition, the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the contextual object is an "or" relationship.
应理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本发明实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that, in various embodiments of the present application, the size of the serial numbers of the above processes does not mean the order of execution, and the order of execution of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not be taken to the embodiments of the present invention. The implementation process constitutes any limitation.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各举例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每 个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the various unit and algorithm steps described in connection with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in electronic hardware or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the solution. A person skilled in the art can use different methods to implement the described functionality for each particular application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of the present application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。A person skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and brevity of the description, the specific working process of the system, the device and the unit described above can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided by the present application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other manners. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative. For example, the division of the unit is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. In addition, the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, and may be in an electrical, mechanical or other form.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of the embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(ROM,Read-Only Memory)、随机存取存储器(RAM,Random Access Memory)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。The functions may be stored in a computer readable storage medium if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a standalone product. Based on such understanding, the technical solution of the present application, which is essential or contributes to the prior art, or a part of the technical solution, may be embodied in the form of a software product, which is stored in a storage medium, including The instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of the present application. The foregoing storage medium includes: a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk, and the like. .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本The foregoing is only a specific embodiment of the present application, but the scope of protection of the present application is not limited thereto, and any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in the present application. Should be covered in this
申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。Within the scope of protection of the application. Therefore, the scope of protection of the present application should be determined by the scope of the claims.
Claims (26)
Priority Applications (9)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN201880006187.2A CN110476364B (en) | 2017-01-06 | 2018-01-08 | Signal transmission method and device |
| JP2019536957A JP7114600B2 (en) | 2017-01-06 | 2018-01-08 | Signal transmission method and device |
| EP21175184.7A EP3944509B1 (en) | 2017-01-06 | 2018-01-08 | Signal transmission method and apparatus |
| EP18736509.3A EP3567739B1 (en) | 2017-01-06 | 2018-01-08 | Signal transmission method and apparatus |
| KR1020197023153A KR102308639B1 (en) | 2017-01-06 | 2018-01-08 | Signal transmission method and device |
| CA3049490A CA3049490C (en) | 2017-01-06 | 2018-01-08 | Signal transmission method and apparatus |
| BR112019014060-3A BR112019014060B1 (en) | 2017-01-06 | 2018-01-08 | SIGNAL TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS, COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIA, AND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM |
| US16/504,010 US11122572B2 (en) | 2017-01-06 | 2019-07-05 | Signal transmission method and apparatus |
| US17/461,403 US11751187B2 (en) | 2017-01-06 | 2021-08-30 | Signal transmission method and apparatus |
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN201710011409.7 | 2017-01-06 | ||
| CN201710011409 | 2017-01-06 | ||
| CN201710687933.6 | 2017-08-11 | ||
| CN201710687933.6A CN108282198B (en) | 2017-01-06 | 2017-08-11 | Signal transmission method and device |
Related Child Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| US16/504,010 Continuation US11122572B2 (en) | 2017-01-06 | 2019-07-05 | Signal transmission method and apparatus |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2018127181A1 true WO2018127181A1 (en) | 2018-07-12 |
Family
ID=62789586
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2018/071786 Ceased WO2018127181A1 (en) | 2017-01-06 | 2018-01-08 | Signal transmission method and apparatus |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| WO (1) | WO2018127181A1 (en) |
Cited By (28)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN110933749A (en) * | 2018-09-20 | 2020-03-27 | 成都华为技术有限公司 | Method and device for indicating beam |
| CN111586855A (en) * | 2019-02-15 | 2020-08-25 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and device for signal transmission |
| US20200374728A1 (en) * | 2019-05-21 | 2020-11-26 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Reporting of information related to sounding reference signals (srs) timing adjustments |
| CN112399574A (en) * | 2019-08-15 | 2021-02-23 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and apparatus for wireless communication and communication device |
| CN112470419A (en) * | 2018-08-10 | 2021-03-09 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and device for reporting channel state information |
| CN113169779A (en) * | 2018-09-14 | 2021-07-23 | 夏普株式会社 | Base station device, terminal device, and communication method |
| CN113382419A (en) * | 2020-03-09 | 2021-09-10 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | Measurement configuration method, terminal and network side equipment |
| CN113395727A (en) * | 2018-08-30 | 2021-09-14 | 河南信安通信技术股份有限公司 | Hot spot collecting device |
| CN113412584A (en) * | 2018-12-06 | 2021-09-17 | 株式会社Ntt都科摩 | User terminal |
| EP3836674A4 (en) * | 2018-08-09 | 2021-09-22 | ZTE Corporation | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR INFORMATION ELEMENT TRANSFER AND METHOD AND DEVICE FOR INFORMATION RECEIVING |
| CN113518355A (en) * | 2020-04-10 | 2021-10-19 | 华为技术有限公司 | Quasi co-location relation management method and device |
| CN113541891A (en) * | 2020-04-15 | 2021-10-22 | 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 | Method and apparatus in a node used for wireless communication |
| CN113676295A (en) * | 2020-05-13 | 2021-11-19 | 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 | A reference signal receiving and sending method, terminal and network device |
| CN113826423A (en) * | 2019-08-09 | 2021-12-21 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and device for data transmission |
| CN114070522A (en) * | 2020-08-07 | 2022-02-18 | 北京紫光展锐通信技术有限公司 | Uplink channel measurement method and device for multiple TRP scenes, storage medium, terminal and base station |
| CN114128165A (en) * | 2019-07-19 | 2022-03-01 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and apparatus for transmitting synchronization signals |
| CN114175743A (en) * | 2019-08-16 | 2022-03-11 | 华为技术有限公司 | A method and device for signal transmission and method and device for signal reception |
| CN114205735A (en) * | 2020-09-03 | 2022-03-18 | 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 | Method and apparatus in a node used for wireless communication |
| CN114245391A (en) * | 2021-11-26 | 2022-03-25 | 中国信息通信研究院 | Wireless communication information transmission method and equipment |
| CN114451022A (en) * | 2019-09-30 | 2022-05-06 | 华为技术有限公司 | Power adjustment method and device |
| US20220149901A1 (en) * | 2019-07-26 | 2022-05-12 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Communication Method and Communications Apparatus |
| CN114600524A (en) * | 2019-12-09 | 2022-06-07 | 华为技术有限公司 | Communication method and device |
| CN114651502A (en) * | 2020-10-20 | 2022-06-21 | 华为技术有限公司 | Wireless communication method and communication device |
| CN114760021A (en) * | 2018-09-27 | 2022-07-15 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | Measurement configuration method, device, equipment, system and storage medium |
| CN114846750A (en) * | 2019-12-24 | 2022-08-02 | 华为技术有限公司 | Terrestrial and non-terrestrial communication systems, devices and methods |
| US11405089B2 (en) | 2018-09-28 | 2022-08-02 | Sony Group Corporation | Method and system for managing interference in multi TRP systems |
| CN116349336A (en) * | 2020-10-23 | 2023-06-27 | 华为技术有限公司 | Beam management method and communication device |
| US12170982B2 (en) | 2020-02-27 | 2024-12-17 | Shanghai Langbo Communication Technology Company Limited | Method and device related to spatial relation in a node used for wireless communication |
Citations (4)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20050101354A1 (en) * | 2003-11-10 | 2005-05-12 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Apparatus and method for forming downlink beam in a smart antenna system |
| CN101110622A (en) * | 2006-07-21 | 2008-01-23 | 普天信息技术研究院 | A Beamforming Method for Forward Access Channel |
| WO2016005003A1 (en) * | 2014-07-11 | 2016-01-14 | Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd | Methods and nodes in a wireless communication network |
| WO2016086144A1 (en) * | 2014-11-26 | 2016-06-02 | Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. | Initial access in high frequency wireless systems |
-
2018
- 2018-01-08 WO PCT/CN2018/071786 patent/WO2018127181A1/en not_active Ceased
Patent Citations (4)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20050101354A1 (en) * | 2003-11-10 | 2005-05-12 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Apparatus and method for forming downlink beam in a smart antenna system |
| CN101110622A (en) * | 2006-07-21 | 2008-01-23 | 普天信息技术研究院 | A Beamforming Method for Forward Access Channel |
| WO2016005003A1 (en) * | 2014-07-11 | 2016-01-14 | Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd | Methods and nodes in a wireless communication network |
| WO2016086144A1 (en) * | 2014-11-26 | 2016-06-02 | Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. | Initial access in high frequency wireless systems |
Cited By (52)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US11595829B2 (en) | 2018-08-09 | 2023-02-28 | Zte Corporation | Method and device for transmitting information element |
| EP3836674A4 (en) * | 2018-08-09 | 2021-09-22 | ZTE Corporation | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR INFORMATION ELEMENT TRANSFER AND METHOD AND DEVICE FOR INFORMATION RECEIVING |
| US11888563B2 (en) | 2018-08-10 | 2024-01-30 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Channel state information reporting method and apparatus |
| CN112470419A (en) * | 2018-08-10 | 2021-03-09 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and device for reporting channel state information |
| CN113395727A (en) * | 2018-08-30 | 2021-09-14 | 河南信安通信技术股份有限公司 | Hot spot collecting device |
| CN113169779A (en) * | 2018-09-14 | 2021-07-23 | 夏普株式会社 | Base station device, terminal device, and communication method |
| US12016005B2 (en) | 2018-09-14 | 2024-06-18 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Terminal device, and communication method for sounding reference signal transmission using spatial domain filter settings |
| US12010527B2 (en) | 2018-09-20 | 2024-06-11 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Beam indication method and apparatus |
| CN110933749A (en) * | 2018-09-20 | 2020-03-27 | 成都华为技术有限公司 | Method and device for indicating beam |
| CN114760021A (en) * | 2018-09-27 | 2022-07-15 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | Measurement configuration method, device, equipment, system and storage medium |
| US11405089B2 (en) | 2018-09-28 | 2022-08-02 | Sony Group Corporation | Method and system for managing interference in multi TRP systems |
| CN113412584A (en) * | 2018-12-06 | 2021-09-17 | 株式会社Ntt都科摩 | User terminal |
| CN113412584B (en) * | 2018-12-06 | 2024-05-14 | 株式会社Ntt都科摩 | Terminal, communication method, base station and system |
| US11937203B2 (en) | 2019-02-15 | 2024-03-19 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Signal transmission method and apparatus |
| CN111586855B (en) * | 2019-02-15 | 2024-02-09 | 华为技术有限公司 | Signal transmission method and device |
| CN111586855A (en) * | 2019-02-15 | 2020-08-25 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and device for signal transmission |
| US20230319619A1 (en) * | 2019-05-21 | 2023-10-05 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Reporting of information related to sounding reference signals (srs) timing adjustments |
| US20200374728A1 (en) * | 2019-05-21 | 2020-11-26 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Reporting of information related to sounding reference signals (srs) timing adjustments |
| US11751082B2 (en) * | 2019-05-21 | 2023-09-05 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Reporting of information related to sounding reference signals (SRS) timing adjustments |
| US12149979B2 (en) * | 2019-05-21 | 2024-11-19 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Reporting of information related to sounding reference signals (SRS) timing adjustments |
| CN114128165A (en) * | 2019-07-19 | 2022-03-01 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and apparatus for transmitting synchronization signals |
| CN114128165B (en) * | 2019-07-19 | 2024-06-04 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and device for transmitting synchronization signals |
| EP3986059A4 (en) * | 2019-07-26 | 2022-08-10 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Communication method and communication device |
| US20220149901A1 (en) * | 2019-07-26 | 2022-05-12 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Communication Method and Communications Apparatus |
| US11799520B2 (en) * | 2019-07-26 | 2023-10-24 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Communication method and communications apparatus |
| CN113826423A (en) * | 2019-08-09 | 2021-12-21 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and device for data transmission |
| CN113826423B (en) * | 2019-08-09 | 2023-07-11 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and device for data transmission |
| CN112399574A (en) * | 2019-08-15 | 2021-02-23 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and apparatus for wireless communication and communication device |
| CN112399574B (en) * | 2019-08-15 | 2023-10-24 | 华为技术有限公司 | Wireless communication method and device and communication equipment |
| US12069645B2 (en) | 2019-08-15 | 2024-08-20 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Wireless communication method and apparatus and communication device |
| US12127134B2 (en) | 2019-08-16 | 2024-10-22 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Signal sending method and apparatus, and signal receiving method and apparatus |
| CN114175743A (en) * | 2019-08-16 | 2022-03-11 | 华为技术有限公司 | A method and device for signal transmission and method and device for signal reception |
| CN114451022A (en) * | 2019-09-30 | 2022-05-06 | 华为技术有限公司 | Power adjustment method and device |
| CN114451022B (en) * | 2019-09-30 | 2024-06-11 | 华为技术有限公司 | Power adjustment method and device |
| US12225476B2 (en) | 2019-09-30 | 2025-02-11 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Power adjustment method and apparatus |
| CN114600524A (en) * | 2019-12-09 | 2022-06-07 | 华为技术有限公司 | Communication method and device |
| US11979220B2 (en) | 2019-12-24 | 2024-05-07 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Terrestrial and non-terrestrial communication systems, apparatuses, and methods |
| US11621768B2 (en) | 2019-12-24 | 2023-04-04 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Terrestrial and non-terrestrial communication systems, apparatuses, and methods |
| CN114846750A (en) * | 2019-12-24 | 2022-08-02 | 华为技术有限公司 | Terrestrial and non-terrestrial communication systems, devices and methods |
| US12170982B2 (en) | 2020-02-27 | 2024-12-17 | Shanghai Langbo Communication Technology Company Limited | Method and device related to spatial relation in a node used for wireless communication |
| CN113382419A (en) * | 2020-03-09 | 2021-09-10 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | Measurement configuration method, terminal and network side equipment |
| CN113518355A (en) * | 2020-04-10 | 2021-10-19 | 华为技术有限公司 | Quasi co-location relation management method and device |
| CN113518355B (en) * | 2020-04-10 | 2023-10-20 | 华为技术有限公司 | Quasi co-location relation management method and device |
| CN113541891A (en) * | 2020-04-15 | 2021-10-22 | 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 | Method and apparatus in a node used for wireless communication |
| CN113541891B (en) * | 2020-04-15 | 2022-07-08 | 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 | Method and device used in node of wireless communication |
| CN113676295A (en) * | 2020-05-13 | 2021-11-19 | 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 | A reference signal receiving and sending method, terminal and network device |
| CN114070522A (en) * | 2020-08-07 | 2022-02-18 | 北京紫光展锐通信技术有限公司 | Uplink channel measurement method and device for multiple TRP scenes, storage medium, terminal and base station |
| CN114070522B (en) * | 2020-08-07 | 2023-04-07 | 北京紫光展锐通信技术有限公司 | Uplink channel measurement method and device for multiple TRP scenes |
| CN114205735A (en) * | 2020-09-03 | 2022-03-18 | 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 | Method and apparatus in a node used for wireless communication |
| CN114651502A (en) * | 2020-10-20 | 2022-06-21 | 华为技术有限公司 | Wireless communication method and communication device |
| CN116349336A (en) * | 2020-10-23 | 2023-06-27 | 华为技术有限公司 | Beam management method and communication device |
| CN114245391A (en) * | 2021-11-26 | 2022-03-25 | 中国信息通信研究院 | Wireless communication information transmission method and equipment |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US11751187B2 (en) | Signal transmission method and apparatus | |
| WO2018127181A1 (en) | Signal transmission method and apparatus | |
| US11546020B2 (en) | Communication method, communications apparatus, network device, and terminal | |
| CN112640543B (en) | Timing Advance in New Radio | |
| WO2019153347A1 (en) | Method and device for receiving and transmitting configuration information, and communication system | |
| JP2023552433A (en) | Method and apparatus for RedCap UE identification | |
| US20190260565A1 (en) | Information transmission method, apparatus, and system | |
| WO2018137703A1 (en) | Information transmission method and device | |
| WO2022001783A1 (en) | Coverage enhancement method and device | |
| JP7746519B2 (en) | Communication control method, network-controlled repeater, network node, chipset, program, and mobile communication system | |
| JP7746383B2 (en) | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, WIRELESS TERMINAL, NETWORK NODE, CHIPSET, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND PROGRAM | |
| CN120786433A (en) | Communication method and communication device | |
| CN118870409A (en) | Beam management method, device, terminal and storage medium |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| DPE1 | Request for preliminary examination filed after expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed from 20040101) | ||
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 18736509 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
| ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 3049490 Country of ref document: CA Ref document number: 2019536957 Country of ref document: JP Kind code of ref document: A |
|
| NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
| REG | Reference to national code |
Ref country code: BR Ref legal event code: B01A Ref document number: 112019014060 Country of ref document: BR |
|
| ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 20197023153 Country of ref document: KR Kind code of ref document: A |
|
| ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2018736509 Country of ref document: EP Effective date: 20190806 |
|
| ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 112019014060 Country of ref document: BR Kind code of ref document: A2 Effective date: 20190708 |